Home

Canon imagePRESS C800/C700 Operation Guide

1. _ 134 Kakugata 2 135 ISO C5 L Bulk paper module te AP oO Lt L__4 J TT J 136 Nagagata 3 Kakugata 2 137 No 10 COM10 ISO C5 DL 138 Some types of Yougatanaga Monarch Yougatanaga 3 3 depending on the manufacturer The following table shows the loading limits in the bulk paper tray Envelope type Loading limit Loading limit mark Nagagata 3 160 mm 6 3 Not applicable Nagagata 3 side seam envelope 100 mm 3 9 Yougatanaga 3 100 mm 3 9 ieil Kakugata 2 100 mm 3 9 taal Kakugata 2 side seam envelope 45 mm 1 8 Not applicable No 10 COM10 100 mm 3 9 1SO C5 DL Chapter 9 References 261 imagePRESS C800 Series Feed instruction for envelopes Envelope type Loading limit Loading limit mark Monarch 70 mm 2 8 Bana Special feeder TE r a __ HE E l 141 No 10 COM10 DL ISO C5 Yougatanaga 3 142 Monarch 262 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Feed instruction for tab paper Feed instruction for tab paper 4 143 Forward order tab paper and reverse order tab paper
2. The following table shows the orientation of tab paper in the paper trays Load the reverse order tab paper face down with the tabs at the left hand side of the tray in e Internal paper trays of the print module e Inserter Load forward order tab paper face up with the tabs at the right hand side of the in tray e Paper module e Bulk paper module e Special feeder Chapter 9 References 263 imagePRESS C800 Series Status indicators Status indicators Job status indicators The control panel shows the following icons to indicate the job status Icon Description The print system downloads a print document via the network spooling The print system converts a print document into a printable bit map ripping The print system prints a job The job is ready to print The print system converts and prints the print document simulta neously ripping and printing The job contains a note for the print operator The job is a PDF VT job The job is a streaming job The job is a proof print The job is a bundled job The settings of the job can cause a conflict Check the job settings to resume the print process The job causes a ripping error 264 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Paper tray indicators Paper tray indicators The control panel shows the following icons to indicate the status of the paper trays eon esto The paper tray holds media
3. et 1 staple 1 staple ABC Top left i Top right 2 ABC El aal u Se 1 staple a Bottom right J 252 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Feed direction for stapling Staple position A4 LTR A3 11 x 17 Orientation Staple setting Orientation Staple setting 2 staples ABC Right edge ABC Fae Saddle stitch ing ABC Use the glass plate The following table shows the orientation of originals in relation to the required staple position Staple position A4 LTR A3 11 x 17 Orientation Staple setting Orientation Staple setting 7 1 staple 1 staple nae A Top left z Bottom left 1 staple 8 Top right gt l 2 staples nee A Left edge l r 2 staples ABC 8A Left edge l 7 1 staple 1 staple ABC z Bottom left gt JA Top left 1 staple ES To
4. c eeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 103 changing settings IN QUCUGC eeseeeeeeeeees 106 combining in DOCBOX cceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeee 93 editing in DOCBOX eee eeceeeeeeettteeeeeeeeseesaeeeeeeeees 92 trom US Biccieri devon vetiessetedeveesnenseceniededs 54 locking settings in DOCBOX ssceeeeeeeees 94 page PFOGFAMMING ccccceeesessteeeeeesessssneneeees 244 page programming N QUEUE eee eeeeeeeeeee 107 printing from DocBoOX ssssesssesesssrsssrrresrrenesrnns 95 printing from list of scheduled jobs 110 printing from the list of waiting jobs 109 proofing ANC teEStING ccccccccccesssssstteeeeeeeeees 116 PEIMOVIN GAs essscetssecczsecesesceeezisccsezetssctssetapereteeaet 114 FEPFINtiN gossins 112 routing via workflow profileS cceeeeees 13 SLOPPING asics Assi de eee aa a aE Eaa 154 transaction printing MOdEC eeeeeeeeees 87 viewing IN QUCUC ceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeaeeeeees 102 Print job PDEA Teia eea aa a e aaa ara aaea 71 PIOOPING ccceeeesseceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeneeeeeneaeaes 118 SQUlIN KA E 242 settings on control panel 242 via automated workfloW ssssssssssssssrssssrsssses 70 Print module GleaNiN sssini eee 221 DaltS iv Ane Hea we eect ie 228 Print operator color MANAGEMENL cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaaes 26 Media CONFIQUIATION eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeetetetees 30 Print operators TASKS isi its ei ein
5. A Schedule Jobs Trays system 53 Bundled jobs in the list of waiting jobs For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 View the jobs in the queues on page 102 Before you begin Check that all individual jobs have the same output location Procedure 1 Touch Jobs gt Queues gt Waiting jobs 2 Select the jobs to combine or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple jobs together 3 Press Bundle The Create bundle window appears 4 Use the Up and Down buttons to change the job order in the bundle if required 5 Press OK Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 103 imagePRESS C800 Series Bundle jobs NOTE Split the combined job into the individual jobs using the Split function 104 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Add extra sheets to a job Add extra sheets to a job You can add extra sheets to print and copy jobs to get more information on your printed jobs Use banner and trailer sheets to see the beginning and end of a job Use separator sheets to separate the sets in jobs Print job information is printed on banner and trailer sheets while separator sheets are not printed on eo oe 54 Banner and trailer sheets contain job ticket information and separate jobs a 55 Separator sheets separate sets in jobs Use the Settings Editor to enable the banner sheets and trailer sheets and to define the media for t
6. 166 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series Adjust CMYK curves for a single job Adjust CMYK curves for a single job In exceptional cases it is necessary to adjust the calibrated CMYK curves on job level For that single job the adjusted CMYK curves on job level are added to the CMYK curves of the media family and the CMYK curves on system level You can adjust the CMYK curves for a job in the following locations e List of waiting jobs A DocBox O IMPORTANT Be aware that a consistent reproduction of colors is difficult when you adjust CMYK curves on job level Ready 94 Basic mode Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high 167 imagePRESS C800 Series Adjust CMYK curves for a single job 95 Advanced mode For more information see Print job settings on page 242 Before you begin Perform a printer calibration See Ca ibrate the printer on page 162 Procedure 1 Press Jobs 2 Go to the location of the job 3 Select the job 4 Touch Properties gt Adjust image The Basic mode window opens 5 Make the adjustments Use the color slide bars to adjust the curves by color Use the and sign to the right of the K bar to adjust the density in one step 6 Touch Advanced mode at the upper right corner of the view if required The window opens with the color Cyan
7. A paper tray does not Check if you closed all paper trays correctly open Printed media has curls Perform the curled output media correction procedure Correct curled output media on page 176 See Images on the printed out Perform a media registration put are not aligned correct Perform a media registration on page 177 See ly Images on the printed out Perform the skewed and rotated image correction procedure put are skewed or slightly Correct skewed and rotated images on page 179 See rotated Similar colors for text and Perform a media calibration for all halftones color panes in the source Calibrate the media family on page 163 See document are different on the printed output Similar colors in the source When the different media are in two media families calibrate both document are different on media families different media If the different media are in one media family create a new media family with new output profiles and calibrate the new media fami ly Calibrate the media family on page 163 See CMYK colors are not cor Perform the automatic color mismatch procedure rectly aligned Automatic color mismatch correction on page 171 See 230 Chapter 8 Help imagePRESS C800 Series Problem Solving Prom soon Printed output has white Enable the trapping preset setting gaps between color panes Print quality settings on page 243 See You can create new trapping presets Create a trappi
8. Auto Stacker stapl Margin erase Adjust image Q C88 0 0 Color 0 0 Color Black amp white Automatic color det Binding P Method None Folding None Trimming Ex Ex None Punching Punching None For more information see About copy jobs on page 55 Copy job settings on page 236 AMI S Use templates for recurring jobs on page 66 Copy subsets combined copying on page 67 Before you begin Read the instructions detailing how to use the automatic document feeder and the glass plate See Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 59 or Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 61 Procedure 1 Place a set of originals into the automatic document feeder or place an original on the glass plate Oo 0 Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan Select a copy template Define the original settings in the Original pane 1 Define the output settings in the Output pane 2 Enter a job name and the number of sets in the Job pane 3 Select the destination of the copy 3 To scan now and print later select the list of waiting jobs or a DocBox Check the results of your settings in the preview pane 4 9 Touch the start button imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs 63 Make a scan Make a scan You can start a scan job from the automatic document feeder or the glass plate When the scan area
9. Finishing and delivery Professional stacker stapler There are two professional stacker stapler configurations the stacker stapler with and without a booklet maker The booklet maker folds and staples booklets Both finisher configurations can enable the optional punch unit to punch two three or four holes in the printed output The dashboard of the control panel displays the status of the staple cartridges When the color of the staple icon is orange or red the staple cartridge needs replacement See System monitoring on page 120 xy ERAN CG STAN SSS ARR A aR 15 Professional stacker stapler with and without booklet maker aa Description stacker stapler 1 Cover to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs 2 Cover to access the area where you replace staple cartridges clear a paper jam or clear a staple jam 3 Booklet tray to collect booklets 4 Auxiliary booklet tray to collect large booklets 5 Lower tray to collect finished output The guides enable correct placement of the printed output 6 Upper tray to collect finished output The guides enable correct placement of the printed output Chapter 2 Explore the print system 43 imagePRESS C800 Series Professional stacker stapler 16 Internal view of the stacker stapler and saddle stitch unit Saddle Finishe
10. Last used When you want to reuse the settings of the previous copy job You cannot use this function for a combined copy job To DocBox When the destination of the copy job is the first available DocBox or DocBox of your choice Copy job definition PRISMAsync automatically defines a number of settings for the originals and the copy However you can overrule these automatic settings The automatic settings have the prefix Auto Original type Job name Copy job 11 Destination Auto Portrait left Scheduled jobs Binding edge Auto Portrait left Layout Zoom Fit to page Auto Top left Front 0 0 0 100 Back 0 0 0 2 BE Margin erase Adjust image Color Black amp white Q g3 Auto Stacker stapl C88 0 0 Automatic color det Color 0 0 Binding Folding Trimming Punching sed Bx EX Ex Folding None None Punching None Save as template 28 The copy job panes and buttons The following copy job information is available a Description 1 Original pane with the settings for the originals 2 Output pane with the settings for the copy 3 Job pane with generic settings for the entire job 4 Preview pane to show the results of the settings 5 Action buttons to save settings in a template or to indicate subsets For more information see Copy job
11. q A WARNING Do not store toner cartridges in places that are exposed to open flames This can cause toner ignition which may result in burns or a fire If toner gets onto your hands or clothing immediately wash it off with cold water Warm water will set the toner If this happens it becomes impossible to remove the toner CAUTION e If toner is ingested consult a physician immediately gt O IMPORTANT For information about Canon waste toner containers see Consumables on page 185 Your local authorized Canon dealer will dispose of used waste toner containers e You cannot reuse toner Do not mix new and used toner together Only use waste toner containers intended for your print system Do not replace the waste toner container before a message on the control panel appears to inform you that you must replace the container e When you insert the waste toner container push the container as far as possible eC NOTE When you replace the waste toner container during a print job the print process will resume after the waste toner container is replaced For more information see Access the print module parts on page 228 Check the filling levels of the waste toner container on page 129 System monitoring on page 120 196 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Replace the waste toner container Procedure 1 Open the front left cover of the print module 2 Go to the control panel
12. 163 g m2 TopColor White 43 155 g m2 TopCoated White Tabloid 11x17 161 g m2 TopCoaked White A3 160 g m2 TopColor White A3 250 g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 161 g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 271 g m2 TopColor White SRA4 100 g m2 TopColor Whe Booklet cover SRA3 100 g m2 TopColor White 228305 100 g m2 TopColor White 305x440 100 gim2 TopColoe White A3 300 g m2 TopColor White Customer A A4 100 g m2 TopColor White H il Printer connected 134 168 44 108 A e gt fj Production Output Copies alll Offset stacked normal Show less 1 Destination ah Scheduled jobs Sort Prine delivery Stacher stapler r el Sort by set lower tray Offset stacked Yes Separator sheets ve Image shift Watermark ny Printer defaut None Auto Auto a Auto Auto Cxtput orientation Templabe Factory default 22 The media catalog in the printer driver 50 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Prepare print jobs with the printer driver v Show less Layout 2 sided normal Media Printer default 1 sided or 2 sided E 2 sided Photographic content default Finishing Xx No finishing Printer connected 134 188 44 108 Production Output mi Offset stacked normal gt Show less Copies 1 Dest
13. 65 Ib cover coated Lifetime 500 000 sheets or more Paper Folding Unit F1 Description Optional fold unit with various folding options tri fold in tri fold out parallel fold z fold half fold Tray capacity Folding unit output tray e Parallel fold 20 sheets Stacker stapler upper and lower tray e Z fold half fold A3 B4R 11 x 17 30 sheets e Z fold half fold A4R LTRR LGLR 10 sheets Stacker stapler booklet tray e Z fold half fold 10 sheets Paper weight 52 105 g m 14 Ib bond 28 Ib bond Parallel fold 52 90 g m2 14 Ib bond 24 Ib bond Chapter 9 References 275 imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Paper size Z fold A4R B4R A3 LTRR LGL 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm Tri fold in A4R LTRR Parallel fold A4R LTRR Double parallel fold A4R LTRR LGL Half fold A4R LTRR Power requirement From Finisher AM1 or Saddle Finisher AM2 Power consumption Maximum 150 W Dimensions WxDxH 336 mm x 793 mm x 1190 mm 13 1 4 x 31 1 4 x 46 7 8 Weight Approximately 71 kg 157 Ib Finisher AM1 Specification Value Description Stacker stapler with offset stacking stapling punching folding and staple cut for thin sets Paper size for stacking Location lower tray upper tray booklet tray Default sizes 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R A5R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR Custom sizes
14. Ca The paper tray is empty Lv J The paper tray is empty and a print job is active The paper tray is open A The paper tray contains too much media Remove sheets from the stack to resume the print production The paper tray contains media that the print system feeds in long edge di rection The paper tray contains media for example A4R LTRR that the print sys tem feeds in short edge direction The paper tray is in use for the print production The paper tray contains tab sheets The paper tray of the inserter contains tab sheets as insert sheets a agar pees The paper tray of the inserter contains insert sheets Chapter 9 References 265 imagePRESS C800 Series More PRISMAsync color information More PRISMAsync color information The color management of PRISMAsync controls the reproduction of colors and handles the conversion of input colors RGB CMYK spot colors to printed colors on paper PRISMAsync has two instruments for easy color management across the entire workflow color presets and media families so that the operator does not need to perform color management tasks on a job by job basis Color experts can use more color management functions with the advanced color management license See Color reproduction for your output on page 26 for a description of color presets media families and the features of the advanced color management license
15. Letter Executive 11 x 17 Chapter 9 References 281 imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Paper weight Top tray 52 256 g m 14 Ib bond 95 Ib cover Lower and upper tray 52 300 g m 14 Ib bond 110 Ib cover Stacking capacity for stack Top tray ing A4 A5R LTR STMTR 250 sheets or 43 mm 1 69 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTTR 125 sheets or 21 mm 0 83 Upper tray with offset stacked A4 LTR 1 300 sheets or 188 mm 7 4 A3 A4R 11 x 17 LTRR 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g m2 16 Ib bond 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Upper tray without offset stacked A4 A5R LTR STMR 1 300 sheets or 188 mm 7 4 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTTR 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g m2 16 Ib bond 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Lower tray with offset stacked A4 LTR 1 700 sheets or 243 mm 9 57 A3 A4R 11 x 17 LTRR 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g m2 16 Ib bond 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Lower tray without offset stacked AA 2 450 sheets or 347 mm 13 66 A5R STMTR 1 700 sheets or 243 mm 9 57 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTTR
16. On the right hand side you can select the color On the left hand side you can select the areas 7 Define the clipping ranges with the Color clipping settings if required 8 Adjust the calibrated CMYK curve with the three control points on the CMYK curves if required 9 Save the adjustments as a preset for later use if required 168 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series Adjust CMYK curves for all jobs Adjust CMYK curves for all jobs The adjustment of CMYK curves for all jobs occurs on system level The adjusted CMYK curves are added to the media family calibration values and the CMYK curves on system level The adjustments are applied per media family halftone combination O IMPORTANT Be aware that the CMYK adjustments on system level affect all print jobs that use the same media family halftone combination in future 96 Adjustments in basic mode Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high 169 imagePRESS C800 Series Adjust CMYK curves for all jobs 97 Adjustments in advanced mode Before you begin Perform a printer calibration See Ca ibrate the printer on page 162 Procedure 1 Touch System gt Color adjustment gt Edit CMYK curves manually 2 Enter the key operator PIN 3 Select the media family halftone combination 4 Press Edit The Basic mode window ope
17. Za NOTE This manual uses functional names for the print system parts However sometimes you may need the commercial name for example if you want to order an optional In this case use the table with the commercial names The availability of optionals differs per country 7 Base print system with bulk paper module o 6 8 Example of a print system extended with several input and output optionals Description main hardware parts 1 PRISMAsync controller steers the performance workflow image quality and colour quality of the print system Control panel which is the central information point for the print operator Operator attention light to display the status of the print system from a distance Automatic document feeder to copy and scan originals Cover only needed for a print only system Toner compartment cover to access the toner cartridges Internal paper trays to hold media on O an A WwW N Print module where the print process takes place 32 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Main hardware parts a Description main hardware parts 9 Waste toner compartment to access the waste toner container 10 Paper module to hold media 11 Bulk paper module to hold media 12 Special feeder to manually feed special media envelopes and tab paper 13 Output tray to collect the printed output 14 Inserter to feed
18. 242 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Print job settings Property Job setting What you can define Rough image align Align Image move to corners sides or to the middle ment of a sheet You can have more space for margins punch holes or staples Precise image adjust Shift e Margin shift to define the alignment to ment wards the binding edge e Image shift to further define the alignment in vertical direction Different values for front and back sides are possible Delivery settings Property Job setting What you can define Output location Print delivery gt Selection of the output location Output location The output location must support the finishing method Sorting method Print delivery gt Sorting by page or by sets Sort Offset stacking Print delivery gt Stacking with or without an offset Offset stacking Offset stacking depends on the active work flow profile See Workflow profiles on page 73 Advanced settings Print delivery gt e Delivery order of the sheets Advanced settings e Delivery position of the sheets e Delivery with rotation Apply these settings for one or more finishing optionals Print quality settings Property Job setting What you can define Margin erase Margin erase Margin erase for one or more page edges with a maximum of 100 mm 3 94 Adjust color image Adjust image Adjustment of CMYK values on job level See Adjust CMYK curves for a job
19. 38 Job name truncation Procedure 1 Touch System gt Setup gt Job name truncation 2 Indicate how you want to shorten the job name 3 Press OK 84 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Adjust the readability of the control panel Adjust the readability of the control panel You can adjust the brightness and contrast of the control panel screen Use the automatic or manual adjustment 39 Control panel adjustments Procedure Touch System gt Setup gt Operator panel settings 2 Select the auto adjustment method or touch the and buttons to adjust the brightness and contrast 3 Press OK Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 85 imagePRESS C800 Series Use the remote monitor Use the remote monitor With the remote monitor you can monitor the print system status from a workstation or a tablet For more information see System monitoring on page 120 Remote monitor specifications on page 288 Before you begin Make sure that your web browser allows pop up windows Procedure 1 Open the web browser 2 Enter the IP address or hostname of the PRISMAsync controller Use the following format http lt IP address gt remoteinfo or http lt hostname gt remoteinfo https lt IP address gt remoteinfo or https lt hostname gt remoteinfo 86 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Transaction printin
20. 6 and 7 for each following subset Touch Ready when the last subset is scanned Use the optional Page programming function to define the layout and finishing of the subsets Touch Ready to close the Page programming function Define the destination and enter a name for the copy Touch the start button amp to start the copy job SON oo wn S 2 WON oO Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs 67 imagePRESS C800 Series Scan subsets combined scanning Scan subsets combined scanning You can combine different subsets of originals into a scan file With the optional Page programming function you can define the layout and finishing of each subset For more information see About scan jobs on page 57 Scan job settings on page 240 Use page programming on page 107 Before you begin Read the instructions detailing how to use the automatic document feeder and the glass plate See Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 59 or Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 61 Procedure 1 Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan 2 Select one the available scan templates 3 Press Subset 4 Place the first subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate 5 Define the settings for the subset and the scan file 6 Press Scan 7 Place the next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate 8 Define the settings for the subset and the scan file 9 Press Scan 10
21. 80 gj 2 iii TopColor White D ere p 2 1 aea ae ta SCS 100 g m ae TopColor White f aaa vat 2 100 pas a 0 06 A3 100 g m oceadmin 8 36 24 AM TopColor White Schedule Jobs Trays system 65 The Proof button For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 View the jobs in the queues on page 102 Proofing and testing on page 116 DocBox on page 91 Procedure 1 Press Jobs 2 Go to the location of the job 3 Select the jobs you want to proof or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple jobs together 4 Press Proof 118 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Print a job ticket Print a job ticket The Ticket button is available in the following locations e List of scheduled jobs e List of waiting jobs e List of printed jobs A DocBox When you give the Ticket command the job ticket print goes to the last position in the list of scheduled jobs You can recognize the job ticket print by the prefix Properties of in front of the job name Properties _ pelete ound Scheduled jobs Job Waiting jobs lob 3 jobs 1 selected a 5 Es TE r Aa 4 A4D 80 g m J TopColor White MENE A3 100 g m iaaa TopColor White i ees 2 pital 0 06 A3 100 g m oceadmin 08 36 24 TTopolor White
22. Cyclic S 160g m2 TopColor White Letter tab 9x11 Tab inclusive Cyclie 5 163g m2 TopColor White A3 155g m2 TopCoated White Tabloid 11x17 161g m2 TopCoated White A3 160g m2 TopColor White A3 250g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 1619 m TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 271g m2 TopColor White SRA 100g m2 TopColor White SRA3 100g m2 TopColor White 228x305 9x12 100g m2 TopColor White 305x440 12x17 3 100g m2 TopColor White A3 300g m2 TopColor White Printer adjustment PPPDPPPDPPPDPPDPPDPPVBDPPODHD 103 The media catalog in the Settings Editor For Settings Editor specifications see Settings Editor specifications on page 293 For Settings Editor settings see Settings Editor settings and information on page 295 184 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Consumables Consumables The following consumables are available from Canon For more information contact your local authorized Canon dealer We recommend that you order paper stock and toner from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out Recommended paper Toner In addition to plain paper A3 11 x 17 and A4 LTR size recycled paper color paper transparencies recommended for this machine labels and other types of paper stock are available CAUTION Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames as this may cause the paper to ignite resulting in burns or
23. Define the required finishing and delivery options imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs 53 Print a file from a USB drive Print a file from a USB drive You can submit documents that are stored on a USB drive to one of the following locations e List of waiting jobs List of scheduled jobs e A DocBox Name Date C Printaata gt m Feb 2 2011 MAO ae 1 7 35 30 AM Sep 5 2013 pdfvt1 pdf E ii 2 8 58 50 AM Aug 28 2013 12 58 12 PM VDP_SubsetStaplingPPR A z plingPPR prn schedule Jobs Trays system 26 The USB button For more information see Control panelon page 36 Job management in the queues on page 99 Operating concept on page 28 Procedure 1 Insert the USB drive into the USB port at the left hand side of the control panel 2 Touch Jobs gt USB 3 Select the document or use one of the selection functions to select multiple documents together 4 Touch Print to submit the document to the list of Scheduled jobs or touch Save to store the document in one of the other locations Touch the eject button and remove the USB drive g 54 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Prepare copy and scan jobs Prepare copy and scan jobs Copy jobs The copy function enables you to copy paper originals You can define each individual setting for the copy job or use template
24. F A2 is closed When the guide is open you cannot pull out the punch waste tray If applicable close the guide 3 Pull out the punch waste tray Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 211 imagePRESS C800 Series Remove in the professional stacker stapler the punch waste 4 Discard the punch waste O IMPORTANT Make sure that the punch waste tray is completely emptied 5 Push the punch waste tray back to its original position or as far as possible 6 Close the front cover of the stacker stapler CAUTION When you close the front cover of the stacker stapler be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury 212 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Remove in the standard stacker stapler the punch waste Remove in the standard stacker stapler the punch waste The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the punch waste tray is full The print system cannot punch when the punch waste tray is full This instruction only describes the removal of punch waste of the stacker stapler Refer to the user manual of the professional puncher how to remove punch waste from the professional puncher 119 Location of the punch waste tray O IMPORTANT Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine When you perform a maintenance task such as replace a staple cartridge remove waste or solve jams other machine parts can
25. For more information see Print job settings on page 242 Copy subsets combined copying on page 67 Scan subsets combined scanning on page 68 108 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Print a waiting job Print a waiting job When jobs are in the list of waiting jobs you can select one or more jobs to print They will go to the list of scheduled jobs You can maintain full control of the print order and timing To check the job first make a proof print Dgs i Jobs with available media B Be Ree nee A40 100 g m TopColor White 3 Crystals _A34 17 2014 iy 20 1 ee er 0 01 A3C amp 100 gim ath TopColor White 123_veR_cMYK_1S0coated_1 1_F_x3 17 2014 E Sra ee 10 250 Gea fs 0 41 4 100 g m oceadmin 11 31 43 AM TopColor White ee 2 1 e else 0 01 A3 100 g m3 pa TopColor White B A4_Duplex_020p ps 20 1 si lca 0 01 AJD 100 g m e ir TopColor White pr ISOcoated_1 1_F_x3 Printed 73sets 17 2014 7 oceadmin ig i ack 427 sets a setae iB bs at ul i g 31 TopColor White O Schedule Jobs Trays By System 58 The selection options are in the list of waiting jobs For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 View the jobs in the queues on page 102 Proof and test jobs on page 116 Procedure Touch Jobs gt Qu
26. Move a scheduled job to the list of waiting jobs The print system prints jobs that are in the list of scheduled jobs You can decide to print a scheduled job later for example e Because the required media are out of stock e You want to first check the settings and make a proof F x T Properties Delete To top Stop after job Scheduled jobs ob Records Pages B A3_002p pdf oceadmin fe A4P_15pages Frames pdf din 44 m CIT Jobs with available media A4_011p_PP pdf oceadmin AL Jobs with label GQ schedule Jobs Trays system 60 A scheduled job E NOTE When you want to move the active job amp to the list of waiting jobs you must first press the Stop button twice to stop the job For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 View the jobs in the queues on page 102 Proofing and testing on page 116 Stop printing on page 154 Procedure 1 Touch Jobs gt Queues Touch to expand the list of Scheduled jobs if required 3 Select the jobs you want to move or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple jobs together 4 Press Move Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 111 imagePRESS C800 Series Reprint a job Reprint a job To reprint jobs that have already been printed go to the list of printed jobs From the list of printed jobs you can make a copy of one or mo
27. O Schedule Jobs Trays By System 66 Print a job ticket For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 View the jobs in the queues on page 102 Proofing and testing on page 116 DocBox on page 91 Procedure 1 Press Jobs 2 Go to the location of the job 3 Select the jobs for the job ticket print or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple jobs together 4 Press Ticket Chapter 5 Print the jobs 119 imagePRESS C800 Series Keep the system printing Keep the system printing System monitoring Status color The vertical status bar on the dashboard the status LED on the control panel the operator attention light and the remote monitor all have the same status color So you can see when you must intervene to keep your print system running See Schedu e on page 122 67 The status bar on the dashboard of the control panel 1 the status LED of the control panel 2 and the operator attention light 3 The dashboard The dashboard is the upper part of the control panel and is always visible oated_1 1_F_x3 pdf Crystals_A3 ps Upcoming Load A3 3 100 g m2 TopColor White 69 The dashboard when the print system needs you to load media The dashboard shows the following information Description of the dashboard parts 1 Current status of the print system and the active printing mode The document printing m
28. Print the jobs 127 imagePRESS C800 Series Check the filling level of the staple cartridge Check the filling level of the staple cartridge The dashboard at the top of the control panel and the operation attention light warn you when a staple cartridges becomes empty The color of the icon indicates the status of a staple cartridge A blue icon indicates that the staple cartridges contains sufficient staples An orange icon indicates that at least one staple cartridge is almost empty A red icon indicates that at least one staple cartridge is empty Touch a staple cartridge indicator or go to the System view to see the filling levels of the staple cartridges ne p 75 Staple cartridge indicators For more information see Schedule on page 122 System monitoring on page 120 Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler uniton page 199 Replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch uniton page 201 Procedure 1 Touch the indicator or go to System gt Printer 2 Check the filling level in the Finishers pane 128 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Check the filling level of the waste toner container Check the filling level of the waste toner container The dashboard at the top of the control panel and the operation attention light warn you when the waste toner container is full The color of the icon indicates the status of the waste toner container A blue icon indic
29. Split function Move a job to an other DocBox folder with the Move function Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 93 imagePRESS C800 Series Lock DocBox job settings Lock DocBox job settings You can lock a DocBox job to protect its settings The amp icon indicates a locked job Public iF x Ri q amp 5 Properties Delete Select Proof Print D Job d medi B To octox 46 AD 100g m3 DocBox localuser TopColor White w 4DocBoxes Bj Te DocBox 47 AD 100 g m2 localuser TopColor White Le Unlock Schedule Jobs Trays Zy System 45 The lock function in DocBox For more information see DocBox on page 91 Procedure 1 Touch Jobs gt DocBox 2 Select the DocBox folder that contains the job you want to lock 3 Enter a PIN if requested 4 Select one or more jobs that you want to lock or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple jobs together 5 Select Lock from the drop down menu E NOTE Unlock the job again with the Unlock function 94 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Print DocBox jobs Print DocBox jobs You can print DocBox jobs in several ways e Without urgency using the Print function PRISMAsync submits the job to the last position on the list of scheduled jobs e With urgency immediately using the Print now function PRISMAsync submits the job to
30. You can find more PRISMAsync color information below Input and output profiles Input and output profiles define the transition from input colors for example the RGB color values of a photo towards output colors or for example the CMYK color values of your printer The color management of PRISMAsync transforms the color input space to the color output space via the standards of the ICC the International Color Consortium PRISMAsync comes with high quality color output profiles for both coated and uncoated media PRISMAsync links output profiles to media via media families Each media family has three different output profiles for the halftone screens Normal Fine and Error diffusion See Settings Editor media attributes on page 294 Rendering intents A color gamut is a set of colors a system can produce Input colors do not always fit in the color gamut of an output device For colors that exceed the gamut of an output device color space rendering intents are used for gamut mapping The rendering intent tells the color management system how to handle colors that do not fit into the destination color gamut The following rendering intents are available on PRISMAsync e Relative colorimetric Frequently used and suitable for proofing applications on reference paper White point compensation is applied The white point of the output color space is the color of the used media Absolute colorimetric Mainly suitable for proofing applicatio
31. see Job management in the queues on page 99 Procedure 1 Touch Jobs gt Queues 2 Touch to expand the list of Waiting jobs if required 3 Touch to expand the list of Scheduled jobs if required 102 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Bundle jobs Bundle jobs You can bundle jobs stored in the list of waiting jobs When you bundle two or more jobs you create a new job from the individual jobs The new job goes to the last position of the list of waiting jobs The individual jobs are no longer part of the list The bundled job will be given the name of the first individual job in the bundle When you split a bundled job the individual jobs appear again and the bundled job is no longer part of the list The individual jobs go to the last position of the list of waiting jobs The icon indicates a bundled job A r a 8 Split Ticket Select Proof Print 0 jobs 0 selected j 4 jobs 1 selected Bundle Crystals_A3 ps Apr 17 2014 z 3 8 3 1 an 0 01 Multiple media Hf Bundle A4P_15pages Frames pdf Apr 17 2014 m 144 1 cae 0 02 AD 80 g m Operator 3 36 02 PM L TopColor White A Bundle A4P_15pages Frames pdf i i Apr 17 2014 ae g R enok Operator 3 36 13 PM TopColor White Bundle A4P_15pages Frames pdf Apr 17 2014 amp 144 1 oy 0 02 A4D 80 g m Operator 3 36 21 PM O TopColor White
32. take a new stack Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight or high temperatures 146 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the inserter Load media into the inserter The optional inserter can hold up to 200 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond cover sheets or insert sheets The print system cannot print sheets fed by the inserter Use the same feed direction in the upper and lower tray o o le U U oy 80 Location of the inserter O IMPORTANT Make sure you follow the instructions carefully When you do not load the media correctly a paper jam dirty machine parts or poor print quality can occur A CAUTION When you handle paper be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper For more information see nserter on page 40 Paper input specifications on page 270 Consumables on page 185 Supported media types for paper input optionals on page 289 Supported media sizes by paper input optional on page 291 Supported envelope types by paper input optional on page 292 Before you begin e Check and prepare the media See Check and prepare media before loading on page 130 e Awake the print system from sleep mode if applicable See Use the energy save modes on page 192 Chapter 5 Print the jobs 147 imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into
33. to place an original such as a page of a book a heavy or delicate docu ment or a transparency 11 Cover to access the scan area to clean 12 Handle ADF Access Handle as support equipment to close the automatic document feeder See Paper input specifications on page 270 for specifications Chapter 2 Explore the print system 41 imagePRESS C800 Series Special feeder Special feeder The special feeder Stack Bypass B1 enables you to feed media manually for example when you need only a few sheets of special media for your job The special feeder can hold up to 100 sheets 80 g m2 22 Ib bond 13 Special feeder Stack Bypass B1 es Description special feeder 1 Slide guides to place the media in the correct position in the tray 2 Auxiliary tray to place large media A3 11 x 17 or A4R LTRR 3 Alignment tray to prevent skewed images The alignment tray Stack Bypass Alignment Tray C1 prevents skewed images and ensures that media are fed straight ahead You cannot use the auxiliary tray in combination with the alignment tray 14 Alignment tray Stack Bypass Alignment Tray C1 Description alignment tray 1 Screws to attach or loosen the alignment tray 2 Alignment guides to place the media in the correct position in the tray See Paper input specifications on page 270 for specifications 42 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery
34. x 7 1 8 Weight unit Approximately 26 9 kg 59 3 Ib Printer Cover F1 Specification Value Description Cover for print only system Stack Bypass B1 Specification Value Description Special feeder to feed special media manually Maximum paper capacity 100 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond 270 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Paper input specifications Paper size Paper weight Notes Internal paper trays Default sizes 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R A5R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR Custom sizes 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 762 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 30 Custom sizes when stacker stapler is attached 100 mm x 182 mm 330 2 mm x 762 mm 3 9 x 7 2 13 x 30 Envelope types ISO C5 162 mm x 229 mm 6 3 8 x 9 No 10 COM 104 7 mm x 241 3 mm 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Monarch 98 4 mm x 190 5 mm 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 DL 110 mm x 220 mm 4 1 3 x 8 2 3 Nagagata 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Yougatanaga 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Kakugata 2 240 mm x 332 mm 9 1 2 x 13 Custom size envelopes 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Custom size envelopes when stacker stapler is attached 100 mm x 182 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 7 2 13 x 19 2 64 256 g m 17 Ib bond 95 Ib cover e Feed coated paper one sheet at a time e Not available in combination with Multi Drawer Pap
35. 11 x 17 LTTR 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g m2 16 Ib bond 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Lower tray with offset stacked A4 LTR 1 700 sheets or 243 mm 9 57 A3 A4R 11 x 17 LTRR 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g m2 16 Ib bond 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Lower tray without offset stacked A4 2 450 sheets or 347 mm 13 66 A5R STMTR 1 700 sheets or 243 mm 9 57 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTTR 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g m2 16 Ib bond 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Stacking capacity for sta Location upper tray lower tray pling A4 LTR 1 300 sheets 100 sets or 188 mm 7 4 A3 A4R 11 x 17 LTRR 650 sheets 50 sets or 96 mm 3 78 Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g m2 16 Ib bond 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 284 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Maximum stapling capacity A4 LTR 50 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond A3 A4R 11 x 17 LTRR 30 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond The number of sheets vary depending on the media type and weight Stacking capacity for book Location booklet tray lets 1 5 sheets 25 sets 6 10 sheets 15 sets 11 16 sheets 10 sets Maximum saddle stitching 16 sheets 80 g m2 22 Ib bond capacity Incl
36. 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g m2 16 Ib bond 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Stacking capacity for sta Location upper tray lower tray pling A4 LTR 1 300 sheets 100 sets or 188 mm 7 4 A3 A4R 11 x 17 LTRR 650 sheets 50 sets or 96 mm 3 78 Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g m2 16 Ib bond 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 282 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Maximum stapling capacity A4 LTR 50 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond A3 A4R 11 x 17 LTRR 30 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond The number of sheets vary depending on the media type and weight Features Corner stapling two point stapling Power consumption From main unit Maximum 385 W Dimensions WxDxH 644 mm x 656 mm x1 121 mm 25 35 x 25 83 x 44 1 Weight Approximately 48 kg 105 Ib Booklet Finisher T1 Description Stacker stapler extended with saddle stitch functionality Paper size for stacking Location lower tray upper tray top tray Default sizes 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R A5R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR Custom sizes 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 4 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Envelope types ISO C5 162 mm x 229 mm 6 3 8 x 9 No 10 COM 104 7 mm x 241 3 mm 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Monarch 98 4 mm x 190 5 mm 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 DL 110 mm x 220 mm 4 1 3 x 8 2 3 Nag
37. 7 2 x 7 2 13 x 19 2 Chapter 9 References 291 imagePRESS C800 Series Supported envelope types by paper input optional Supported envelope types by paper input optional Media size Internal pa oa feed Bulk paper Paper mod Inserter per tray module ule ISO C5 162 mm x 229 mm 6 3 x9 No 10 COM10 104 7 mm x 241 3 mm 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Monarch 98 4 mm x 190 5 mm 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 DL 110 mm x 220 mm 4 1 3 x 8 2 3 Nagagata 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Yougatanaga 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Kakugata 2 240 mm x 332 mm 9 1 2 x 13 NINN NS NEON N NEN NINN NS AINE NINN NS Custom size 1 1 Custom size internal paper tray 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 2 Custom size special feeder 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Custom size when stacker stapler is attached 100 mm x 182 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 7 2 13 x 19 2 3 Custom size bulk paper module 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 4 Custom size paper module 139 7mm x 182 mm 330 2mm x 487 7 mm 5 1 2 x 7 2 13 x 19 2 4 292 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor Settings Editor Settings Editor specifications URL to access the Settings Editor http lt printername or IP address gt https lt printername or IP address gt Recommended
38. Feeder Attachment F1 for ISO C4 and Kakugata 2 6 Use with Envelope Feeder Attachment G1 Some types of Yougatanaga 3 and Nagagata 2 do not need the Envelope Feeder Attachment G1 This depends on the manufacturer of the envelopes 290 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Supported media sizes by paper input optional Supported media sizes by paper input optional Media size Internal pa Special feed Bulk paper Paper mod per tray er module ule 330 mm x 483 mm 13 x 19 305 mm x 457 mm 12 x 18 SRA3 320 mm x 450 mm 12 6 x 17 7 A3 11 x 17 297 mm x 420 mm 11 7 x 16 5 A4 LTR 297 mm x 210 mm 11 7 x 8 3 A4R LTRR 210 mm x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 A5R STMTR 148 mm x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 NINN NE NININ NEN NIN NINN AI NEN NINN AINA NINN AT NNN NINN Custom sizes 1 1 Custom sizes for internal paper tray 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 2 Custom sizes for special feeder 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 762 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 30 Custom sizes for special feeder when stacker stapler is attached 100 mm x 182 mm 330 2 mm x 762 mm 3 9 x 7 2 13 x 30 3 Custom sizes for bulk paper module 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 4 Custom sizes for paper module 139 7 mm x 182 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 5 1 2 x 7 2 13 x 19 2 5 Custom sizes for inserter 182 mm x 182 mm 330 2 x 487 7 mm
39. For more information see Special feeder on page 42 Paper input specifications on page 270 Consumables on page 185 Supported media types for paper input optionals on page 289 Supported media sizes by paper input optional on page 291 Supported envelope types by paper input optional on page 292 Before you begin e Check and prepare the media See Check and prepare media before loading on page 130 Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 132 Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 134 e Awake the print system from sleep mode if applicable See Use the energy save modes on page 192 Chapter 5 Print the jobs 145 imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the special feeder Procedure 1 Open the special feeder 2 Squeeze and slide the paper guides towards the sides of the tray 3 Pull out the auxiliary tray for large media sizes 4 Load the media into the special feeder O IMPORTANT Make sure the loaded media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark amp Load a maximum of ten enve lopes Use the correct orientation for the envelopes See Feed instruction for envelopes on page 261 5 Align the media precisely between the paper guides After you finish When a paper jam occurs or you notice poor image quality turn over the media stack and reload the media stack Do not reload textured single sided coated or already printed paper to avoid a paper jam For these media
40. LOCATION soe scencesseessechesveevaasedsectbseveevsesed eudesteaseaenes 36 n nae Trimming system administrator i COPY JODS ania eect deceit 238 color ManagemMent s ssssssessissssirssrrsnsrinesrrrnns 26 f Print SOTUNG cece cesses veetieceieaeceveressvereeeeneeeneecuees 244 Media CONFIQUIATION eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteteeeeetaes 30 settings 295 ne Brie maar erect ae print SYSTOIM ccccccssssecesssseeeessssseeesssseeersssees 190 TASKS ienne arna e i 29 183 System configuration nun on y ake 182 Print Syste Miccinesi 189 ae seseccenenensvsvusnsnnnsscensennnoggnenenuinsssuansnsnanensnt Two knife trimmer a TE commercial NaMe ssssssesssesssrrrserrrrssrrreerrenre 33 INFOPIMATION ccetceeeeeeeesseseneeeeeeeeessssenaeeeeeeeess 37 System TOG ATION EE E A 33 Hotie n E 286 IANQGUAG Cs cite eens cease diving dace deca geet eves 83 eee see ee paitsioon aa 32 remote MONI OTIN sssssssssssssssisssssnnssrnnnssnnnnsnns 86 312 imagePRESS C800 Series Index U Unattended workflow profile COSCIIPTION ccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeneee 78 USB drive printing FLOM eee eeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaaeees 54 USB port locatio Mine ie ais eto ees hes hes sketch eesti 36 USB ports Print module isise aie 228 V Variable data printing CESCHIPTION eee ceeceeeeessseeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeesssssneeeeees 71 VDP COSCIIPTION cecceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeteneeeeeeae 71 Ww Waiting job
41. PDF KO Selection of the PDF interpreter Preferences gt PDF KO Rendering of large texts as graphics Preferences gt PDF KO Default media Preferences gt PDF KO color size type and weight Default print settings Preferences gt PDF KO print resolution 1 sided or 2 sided offset stacking sorting output location sta pling XObject optimization per page or docu Preferences gt PDF KO ment CropBox or MediaBox settings Preferences gt PDF KO Font substitution Preferences gt PDF KO PDF font conversion Preferences gt PDF KO Include PDF fonts and resources per page Preferences gt PDF KO or per document Accounting Account log files Configuration gt Accounting KO separation encoding Definition of account IDs for transaction Configuration gt Accounting KO printing mode Billing counter reports Support gt Counters KO Troubleshooting Settings and information Location Logging reports Support gt Troubleshooting KO data dump file trace file with or with out machine data audit log files configu ration report job logging crashed jobs last job calibration report color configu ration report Handling of crashed jobs Support gt Troubleshooting KO Error job analysis save last received job Support gt Troubleshooting KO when a problem occurs Removal of printed jobs Support gt Troubleshooting KO Removal
42. Repeat steps 7 8 and 9 for each subset 11 Touch Ready when the last subset is scanned 12 Use the optional Page programming function to define the layout and finishing of the subsets 13 Touch Ready to close the Page programming function 14 Define the destination for the scan file enter the job name and the file name ID for the scan file 15 Touch the start button to start the scan job 68 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 4 Plan the jobs Set up your print production preferences Set up your print production preferences Automated workflows An automated workflow automatically links print settings to jobs Every automated workflow represents a different virtual printer with its own specific properties Job preparation ms Ready to print 1 documents o i Waiting Job plannin p g i bs DocBox Scheduled jobs Print production Finishing and delivery C Printing E Media loading 32 Document printing via an automated workflow The use of automated workflows means that the print production increases because you do not need to define individual job settings during the job preparation PRISMAsync has one default automated workflow There are several ways to address an automated workflow You can enter the name of the automated workflow in the label setting of the printer driver e You can use an LPR command with the name of the automated workflow e You can u
43. Use the energy save modes on page 192 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 189 imagePRESS C800 Series Turn off the print system Turn off the print system Turn off the print module and all optionals using the shut down function on the control panel The controller goes into the sleep mode Be aware that the print system needs time to shut down O IMPORTANT Do not use the main power switch on the print module to turn off the print system The shut down function via the control panel automatically changes the position of the main power switch from the I to the O position Procedure 1 Touch System gt Setup 2 Press Shut down system 3 Press Yes A message indicates when the shut down process has started When the shut down process is ready the control panel light will be off 190 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Restart the print system Restart the print system You can restart the print system from the control panel when needed The Settings Editor also provides a function to restart the print system System configuration on page 182 Procedure 1 Touch System gt Setup 2 Press Shut down system 3 Press Restart Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 191 imagePRESS C800 Series Use the energy save modes Use the energy save modes The Settings Editor and the control panel have settings for the energy save modes The system goes into
44. aE N E eee ieee A ners a 250 Feed Girectionssiscitis eid e R E R A R eee ene E ae 251 Feed direction for stapling 1 22 40 act ek ed ei ee ht lon el en al ei TEENA araea i 251 Feed direction Tor PUNCHING ii acai aha Bie ha i kasaio nidia rei adasia diaaa daenda odiata 256 Feed direction for FOLGUING ss sicseccescasesessatescessgecsngcetesedee nce coceccoteneaveisaeesscecdzeicoe aaa giona paa akiapa aadar iaiia 257 Feed direction for the INSGMtEM lt csscccicccsecetcesceeetesccacetsacseeeesacds sri eccungsusiseanstesesananstesenadanasepauiesecnatenasatenebins 259 Feed instruction for CNVClOPES cccccceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaae ee aaeeeesaaaeeseaaaeesesaaeeseseaaeeseseaaeeseneaeeeeesaaeees 261 Feed instruction for tab Papel cccececceeeessceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeessaaeeeesaaeeesegeaaeesesaaesensaeesenenaeeeeneaaes 263 Status INGICAtONS norisei Nae oe Ai i ed ein ea Gan eisai ee 264 J OD Status indicators oiris oniiytont ie niles ilies heeled lade aaa Galvin ipsa 264 Paper tray Indicators sciis sisian uirai aa aaa a es enti HAT AD adie ee 265 More PRISMAsync Color informatiOn c cccccccscceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeecaeeeeesaaeeeeaaeeeeaaeeseeaaeeseseaaeseneeaeeeeenaaes 266 System SPECIFICATIONS eceseeseeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeseeeeeeessseeenseeeeeeessssennanenes 268 Print system SPeCIFICATIONS ceeceeeeeceeeeeee cee eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeaaaee
45. after the jobs are ready Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 193 imagePRESS C800 Series Replace a toner cartridge When a color cartridge becomes empty the print system interrupts the job and you cannot continue to copy or print in color and black amp white However you can cancel the interrupted job and continue to copy or print in black amp white e Never touch the tip of the toner cartridge or hit and shake the cartridge This can cause a toner cartridge leak e Store toner cartridges in a cool location away from direct sunlight The recommended storage conditions are temperatures below 30 C and humidity below 80 For more information see Access the print module parts on page 228 Check the filling level of the toner cartridge on page 127 System monitoring on page 120 Procedure 1 Hold both sides of the toner compartment cov er and open it 2 Go to the control panel and touch System gt Printer 3 Select and press one of the open buttons in the Supplies pane to open the cover of the toner cartridge you want to replace 4 Wait for the internal cover to open automatically O IMPORTANT Do not open the internal cover by force This can cause machine damage 5 Pull out the empty toner cartridge WARNING Do not burn or throw used toner car tridges into open flames This can cause toner ignition in the cartridge which may result in burns or a fire 194 Chapter 7 Maintain the print sys
46. and make sure not to perform the described operations OY OP PB Chapter 1 Preface 11 imagePRESS C800 Series Installation precautions Installation precautions Avoid installing the machine in the following locations Avoid locations subject to temperature and humidity extremes whether low or high For example avoid installing the machine near water faucets hot water heaters humidifiers air conditioners heaters or stoves Avoid installing the machine in direct sunlight If this is unavoidable use curtains to shade the machine Be sure that the curtains do not block the machine s ventilation slots or louvers or interfere with the electrical cord or power supply Avoid poorly ventilated locations This machine generates a slight amount of ozone etc during normal use Although sensitivity to ozone etc may vary this amount is not harmful Ozone etc may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs especially in poorly ventilated rooms It is recommended that the room be appropriately ventilated sufficient to maintain a comfortable working environment in areas of machine operation In addition do not install this machine where it exhausts directly onto a person Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted 12 Chapter 1 Preface imagePRESS C800 Series Installation precautions Avoid locations near
47. and prepares copy and scan jobs e Makes proof prints e Performs last minute job changes e Makes sure that all consumables needed for the jobs are available during the day e Carries out maintenance routines such as a daily calibration procedure or a media registration Trained operators are allowed to carry out specific maintenance tasks for operators For example correction procedures to clean machine parts or to improve the image quality Expert tasks such as media catalog management and advanced color management belong to the role of the system administrator and the key operator The key operator is also responsible for mechanical maintenance tasks and maintenance procedures via the control panel local key operator settings See System configuration and maintenance on page 182 E NOTE This guide is based on the roles and tasks as described above However you may work in a print environment that has different needs For example in small organizations operators can do prepress tasks as well as print operator tasks Media based workflow The media catalog is the backbone of the media based workflow The media catalog contains the media that the print system supports The prepress staff select the media for the job from the media catalog The control panel shows the print operator the media the job needs The media and color expert defines the media and color settings once in the media catalog A D Prepress staf
48. and touch System gt Printer 3 Touch the open button A in the Supplies pane to open the cover of the waste toner container 4 Pull out the tray until it stops 5 Unscrew the attached cap 1 and close the waste toner container with this cap 2 6 Remove the waste toner container CAUTION Do not tilt the waste toner container when you remove it This causes to ner to be spilled onto your hands or clothing 7 Place the new waste toner container 1 and re turn the tray to its original position 2 O IMPORTANT Do not close the top hole of the con tainer with the cap before you return the tray to its original position This can cause a malfunction or machine damage Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 197 imagePRESS C800 Series Replace the waste toner container 8 Close the front left hand cover of the print module A CAUTION When you close the front left hand cover of the print module be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury 198 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Replace in the professional stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit Replace in the professional stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the staple cartridge needs replacing You can find the staple unit in the stacker stapler ie O IMPORTANT For information on the Canon genuine
49. bars to print extra color patches for control of color output via FOGRA verification Using a color bar you can check the ink density dot grain and contrast Use default or compose custom color bars The color bar selection is available in the printer driver PRISMAprepare and via automated workflows or hotfolders e Color mappings to convert RGB CMYK to a specific color for example your corporate color Color mappings are useful to map colors in the input file to a fixed color of a spot color library e Leave out separations to exclude specific spot colors from printing You can exclude layers for printing when you map the colors of these layers to a spot color with the value None For more PRISMAsync color information see More PRISMAsync color information on page 266 Calibration Daily printer calibration is very important to maintain high quality color reproduction Media family calibration is important to maintain consistent color reproduction levels for all the media you use The control panel indicates when printer calibration is needed See About calibration on page 160 Chapter 2 Explore the print system 27 imagePRESS C800 Series PRISMAsync operating concept PRISMAsync operating concept PRISMAsync makes print copy and scan jobs intuitive and productive This fully integrated controller supports the setup of the workflow prepress and job routing The following concepts support your way of working Task b
50. can become uneven when trimmed When the covers use coated paper or insert sheets the first page after the cover can stick to the back of the cover When the covers use coated paper or insert sheets toner streaks can appear on the covers When the covers use coated paper or insert sheets cracks can appear around the folds of the cover IMPORTANT For stapling with the standard stacker stapler Do not use stapling when the paper weight is less than 60 g m 16 Ib bond W IMPORTANT For booklet making with the standard stacker stapler Do not make booklets when the media weight is less than 60 g m 16 Ib bond You cannot saddle stitch media when the media weight is more than 256 g m 94 Ib cover You cannot saddle stitch vellums transparencies prepunched paper tab paper labels and envelopes You cannot saddle fold media when the media weight is more than 256 g m 94 Ib cover You cannot saddle fold vellums transparencies prepunched paper tab paper labels and envelopes 156 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Remove printed output from the stacker stapler O IMPORTANT For punching with the standard stacker stapler e You cannot punch holes when the media weight is more than 256 g m 94 Ib cover e The punch units do not support heavy coated media more than 221 g m vellums transparencies prepunched paper labels and envelopes Ga NOTE Make sure that the booklet tray of the s
51. from the document printing mode in several respects 1 All data in one connection session are part of the same streaming job This streaming job can have job separators In this instance you can see the different job names on the control panel 2 The print resolution for IPDS is 240 300 600 dpi or automatically detected Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 87 imagePRESS C800 Series Transaction printing 3 When the transaction printing jobs contain paper tray selection numbers you can select a mapping method The paper tray number corresponds to a physical tray or to media from the catalog Tray to media mapping You can assign the paper tray number included in the print job to a physical paper tray e Tray to tray mapping You can assign the paper tray number included in the print job to media in the media catalog 4 Color management in the transaction mode works in a similar way to the document printing mode However there are some different color conversion functions e You cannot overrule the input profiles attached to the data stream You can choose to keep or ignore the output color profile in the data stream e You cannot calibrate the printer when the transaction printing mode is active Transaction printing setups A transaction printing setup is a collection of preset print settings for a transaction job such as output location data resolution face orientation offset stacking font capture and logical page size C
52. g m 16 Ib bond 22 Ib bond paper 25 sheets 50 sheets by half fold 80 1 105 g m 23 Ib bond 28 Ib bond 15 sheets 30 sheets by half fold 105 1 209 g m 29 Ib bond 78 Ib cover 5 sheets 10 sheets by half fold 209 1 220 g m 79 Ib cover 82 Ib cover 4 sheets 8 sheets by half fold 1 sheet fold 105 300 g m 28 Ib bond 110 Ib cover Trim capacity for coated 70 79 9 g m 17 Ib bond 21 Ib bond paper 10 sheets 20 sheets by half fold 80 81 4 g m 22 Ib bond 15 sheets 30 sheets by half fold 81 5 128 g m 23 Ib bond 34 Ib bond 10 sheets 20 sheets by half fold 128 1 209 g m 24 Ib bond 78 Ib cover 5 sheets 10 sheets by half fold 209 1 220 g m 79 Ib cover 81 Ib cover 4 sheets 8 sheets by half fold 1 sheet fold 120 300 g m 32 Ib bond 110 Ib cover 64 300 g m2 17 Ib bond 110 Ib cover can be used as cover paper weight of cover sheet must be higher than body sheets Trim width 2mm 15 mm 0 08 0 59 top and bottom Minimum book height 190 mm 7 48 Output capacity 30 booklets Booklet tray of Booklet Trimmer D1 is attached to Two Knife Book let Trimmer A1 Waste tray capacity 1 500 trimmed strips Paper size As defined for Stacker stapler Saddle Finisher AM2 Option for Booklet Trimmer D1 Power requirement 120 127 V AC 50 60 Hz 4A Dimensions WxDxH 536 mm x 770 mm x 1 040 mm 21 1 8 x 30 3 8 x 41 without conveyor tray and o
53. gt Color adjustment 3 Touch Printer calibration details to view the configured calibration procedures 4 Touch Start printer calibration 5 Follow the instructions on the control panel 6 Select Automatic internal sensor in the Calibration method window if the optional internal sensor is installed 7 Close the menu 162 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series Calibrate the media family Calibrate the media family Calibrate a media family in the following situations After the installation of the print system for the default coated and uncoated media families e When anew media family is created e When a service replaces system parts e When you want to increase the print quality for frequently used media families O IMPORTANT A media family calibration calibrates all media of the media family You do not need to perform a media family calibration per media size or per media weight For more information see About calibration on page 160 Calibrate for maximum print quality on page 165 Settings Editor media attributes on page 294 Tools Eye One spectrophotometer Before you begin Make sure you use the same calibration media to represent the media family each time you perform a media family calibration Procedure 1 Calibrate the printer Ca ibrate the printer on page 162 See 2 Touch System gt Color adjustment gt Media family calibration 3 Select the
54. in burns or a fire For more information see Supported envelope types by paper input optional on page 292 1 Make sure the media specifications match the paper tray specifications See Paper in put specifications on page 270 2 Take five envelopes and fix curls or bends 3 Loosen and stack the five envelopes together 132 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Check and prepare envelopes before loading 4 Place the envelopes on a clean level surface and press the complete envelope surface five times to remove any curls 5 Hold down the four corners of the envelopes firmly so that the envelopes stay flat Flap 6 Remove air and creases to flatten the enve lopes Flap After you finish Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight Chapter 5 Print the jobs 133 imagePRESS C800 Series Check and prepare transparencies before loading Check and prepare transparencies before loading Transparencies have a different front and back side Make sure you load transparencies so that the print system prints on the front side IMPORTANT Do not load transparencies while the print system is printing This can cause a paper jam Only use transparencies intended for your print system Other transparencies can damage the print system e Only hold the edges of the sheets and avoid touching the prin
55. jobs that use the media Registration A4 100 g m White Registration parameters frontside X shift mm Y shift mm X elongation 0 01 Y elongation 0 01 Advanced settings Assumed default output orientation Face down Registration wizard Header up 100 The media registration wizard For more information see Media for your output on page 21 Before you begin Check if the image on the printed output is skewed Then first perform a skewed image correction See Correct skewed and rotated images on page 179 Required tools Ruler Procedure 1 Touch System gt Media 2 Select the media from the media catalog 3 Press Registration Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high 177 imagePRESS C800 Series Perform a media registration 4 Make your adjustments manually or start the registration wizard 5 Follow the instructions of the wizard 6 Close the menu 178 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series Correct skewed and rotated images Correct skewed and rotated images When images on the printed output are skewed or slightly rotated perform a correction procedure You are advised to use media with the maximum supported size for this correction The correction procedure changes the media attributes in the media catalog so that the adjustments are applied to all jobs that use the same media You ca
56. license PDF support for IPDS license DP Link support license Remote Manager license Remote Service license Advanced Color Management license e DeviceLink support e Color simulation support e Named colour profile support e Color mapping leave out separations Color control and information bars Asian font sets licenses Korean Japanese Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Languages British English French Italian German Spanish Dutch Finnish Norwegian Swedish Danish Polish Czech Hungarian Portu guese American English Russian Japanese Simplified Chinese Chapter 9 References 269 imagePRESS C800 Series Paper input specifications Paper input specifications Duplex Color Image Reader Unit H1 Specification Value Description Optional automatic document feeder and scanner for duplex scan ning of 1 and 2 sided originals Scan resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Number of tones 256 Capacity 300 originals 80 g m 20 Ib bond Copy scan speed 600 dpi color 70 ipm 1 sided and 2 sided Original paper size A3 A4 A4R A5 A5R 11 x 17 LTR LTRR STMT STMTR Original paper weight 1 sided 38 220 g m 10 Ib bond 81 Ib cover 2 sided black amp white 50 220 g m 13 Ib bond 81 Ib cover 2 sided color 64 220 g m 17 Ib bond 81 Ib cover Detection Automatic paper size detection Power requirement From main unit Dimensions unit WxDxH 633 mm x 603 mm x 179 mm 24 7 8 x 23 3 4
57. main properties of the print job such as name owner destination and media Last minute changes After the first set check proof print or job ticket print you can decide to change one or more job settings You can perform last minute job changes in the list of waiting jobs a DocBox or the list of scheduled jobs For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 Print job settings on page 242 Workflow profiles on page 73 Chapter 5 Print the jobs 117 imagePRESS C800 Series Make a proof Make a proof When you make a proof the print system prints one set of the job A proof print does not affect the number of sets when you print the complete job The proof function is available in the following locations e List of waiting jobs e A DocBox When you select the Proof command a copy of the job goes to the last position in the list of scheduled jobs The original job remains in the list of waiting jobs or in the DocBox You must first move a printed job to the list of waiting jobs before you make a proof The magnifying glass icon indicates a proof print fF aJ F x BY 6 Ez 4 8 Properties Delete Bundle Ticket Select Proof Print Scheduled jobs 0 jobs 0 selected Job Pages Sets Submitted Duration Used media Waiting jobs 3 jobs 1 selected ob Records Pages Sets Submitted Duration Used media a F 4 fe EES Fesp 4 72 1 we ie 0 01 A4D
58. media family to calibrate Select the media family to calibrate nh Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high 163 imagePRESS C800 Series Calibrate the media family 4 Select one of the halftones Normal Fine Error diffusion il Color calibration for specific media a Halftone L 44 135 9 m2 Topcolor white A3 100 g m TopColor White A3 135 g m TopColor White _ tetter 8 sx11 105 g m Topcoler White ees oK Cancel Select a media for the media family calibration Load the calibration media Touch OK Follow the instructions on the control panel Repeat step 3 4 7 and 8 for each halftone IMPORTANT Make sure you have calibrated all halftones Normal Fine and Error diffusion Os Sol 10 Touch Close 164 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series Calibrate for maximum print quality Calibrate for maximum print quality In exceptional situations when a very high print quality is required add shading correction to the calibration See About calibration on page 160 Tools Eye One spectrophotometer Procedure 1 Perform printer calibration in the professional mode See Ca ibrate the printer on page 162 2 Connect the Eye One spectrophotometer to the USB port in the control panel 3 Perform shading correction 1 Touch System gt
59. module on page 39 Chapter 5 Print the jobs 141 imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the bulk paper module Paper input specifications on page 270 Consumables on page 185 Supported media types for paper input optionals on page 289 Supported media sizes by paper input optional on page 291 Supported envelope types by paper input optional on page 292 Before you begin e Check and prepare the media See Check and prepare media before loading on page 130 Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 132 Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 134 Awake the print system from sleep mode if applicable See Use the energy save modes on page 192 Procedure 1 Press the button 1 to open the bulk paper tray i 2 When the media size does not change continue with step 5 otherwise go to step 2 2 Slide the right hand paper guide to the right hand side of the paper tray 3 Lift the feeding support roller and remove all media 4 Squeeze the lever and slide the paper guides so that there is enough space to load the me dia 142 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the bulk paper module 5 Load a media stack of approximately 10 mm je 4 IMPORTANT For media sizes larger than A4 first close and then open the paper tray The inside lifter needs to be raised to correctly load the media larger than A4 Squeeze the front side paper guide and s
60. on page 167 The advanced settings enable adjustment of CMYK curves at three control points and clip ping of color ranges Save the adjustments in a preset for later use gt Chapter 9 References 243 imagePRESS C800 Series Print job settings Property Job setting What you can define Color quality Color Black amp white Color depth selection Information bar selection e Color control bar selection Trapping preset selection The Settings Editor contains the settings to compose the information and color control bar Create custom trapping presets on the System view Finishing settings Property Job setting What you can define Stapling Binding Stapling and saddle stitch settings Folding Folding Fold method Trimming Trimming Trim method according to required trim size or paper size Punching Punching Number of holes or die set dependant punch pattern Page Programming Function Job setting What you can define Page adding Insert Add a page before or after one or more page ranges or subsets Subset or page range Delete Delete one or more page ranges or subsets deletion Selection of job parts Select Select page ranges or subsets according to se lection criteria Combine subsets Merge Select subsets to merge Split combined sub Split Split subset into original subsets sets Redefine finishing set Merge finishing Apply the finishing properties of a subset to tings for subsets mor
61. operator PIN Touch Connectivity to check the connectivity settings Touch Remote connection enabled gt Yes Touch Test to test the connection E NOTE The dashboard shows the status of the connection when Remote Service is active e a a 7 Close the menu Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 225 imagePRESS C800 Series Read the counters Read the counters The following counters give insights into your system productivity e Billing counters Billing counters display the total number of images the print system has produced after installation Day counters Day counters display the total number of images the print system has produced since the last reset to null Reset the day counters at the beginning of the day or before you start a series of jobs for example for a specific customer There are counters for normal media length equal or less than 364 mm 14 3 and large media length more than 364 mm 14 3 A service technician can enable toner cartridge counters Start maintenance Go to the service mode Allow remote assistance Reset day counters Print biling counters report Dp Serial number ZZZ99999 Counters Total 1 Total 2 Total Black Large Total Black Small Total Full Color Single Color Large Total Full Color Single Color Small 124 Counter information Procedure 1 Touch System gt Maintenance 2 Touch Reset day coun
62. originals You can use water or water mixed with a mild cleaning agent to clean Use the cleaning cloth provided When the cleaning cloth becomes dirty wash and rinse it and then leave to dry 121 Location of the glass plate WARNING When you clean the machine first turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord Failure to observe these steps can result in a fire or electrical shock Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly and clean the area around the base of the power plug s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp dusty or smoky location dust can build up around the power plug and become damp This can cause a short circuit and may result in a fire W IMPORTANT Do not dampen the cloth with too much water This can damage prints or machine parts Do not use alcohol benzene paint thinner or other solvents to clean machine parts This can damage plastic machine parts Procedure 1 Moisten the cloth with water or a mild cleaning agent and wring it out thoroughly 2 Clean the glass plate 1 and the underside of the automatic document feeder 2 with the cloth 3 Wipe dry with a soft dry cloth 216 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Clean the automatic document feeder scanning area Clean the au
63. paper and patches of uneven gloss appear in the high density printed areas A4 A3 123 The feed direction of paper path 1 and luster streaks 2 IMPORTANT Only perform this procedure in urgent situations because this procedure can largely decrease the lifetime of the fixing roller Before you begin Make sure the print system does not process any jobs Procedure S OV Ges Touch System gt Maintenance Touch Start maintenance Enter your maintenance PIN Touch Refresh the fixing belt Follow the wizard steps Close the menu After you finish O IMPORTANT If the procedure fails or if you do not achieve the required result contact your local service representative 224 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Enable Remote Service Enable Remote Service Remote Service is a web based application that runs on the print system or on a separate server in the network You need the Settings Editor to configure Remote Service See System configuration and maintenance on page 182 Remote Service has the following functionality e Remote Diagnostics to communicate system information for analysis and troubleshooting e Remote Meter Reading to send counter information for billing purposes e Remote Assistance to remotely provide assistance in case of problems Procedure Touch System gt Setup Press Local key operator settings Enter your key
64. parts on page 228 Paper input specifications on page 270 Consumables on page 185 Supported envelope types by paper input optional on page 292 Before you begin e Check and prepare the media See Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 132 e Awake the print system from sleep mode if applicable See Use the energy save modes on page 192 Procedure 1 Grip the handle and pull out the paper tray un i i til it stops Chapter 5 Print the jobs 149 imagePRESS C800 Series Load envelopes into the internal paper trays 2 Lift up the envelope guide straight from its holder Attach the envelope guide as shown in the il lustration Load one envelope against the right hand side of the paper tray Envelope orientation 1 Nagagata 3 Kakugata 2 Envelope orientation 2 No 10 COM10 ISO C5 DL Monarch Yougatanaga 3 Squeeze the top of the front guide and slide the guides towards and against the envelope 1 and 2 O IMPORTANT Slide the guides until they click into place to prevent a paper jam poor print quality or dirty machine parts Load all envelopes O IMPORTANT 87 Envelope orientation 1 88 Envelope orientation 2 Make sure that the height of the stack does not exceed approximately 33 5 mm 1 3 approximately 50 envelopes Make sure that the height of the envelope stack does not exceed the enve lope loading limit mark Gently close the paper t
65. placement for images Sliding trap Trap objects to images Trap color reduction Trap images to images Small text pt Trap 1 Bit images Thin strokes pt Delete Save as Save Close 99 Trapping preset editor The trapping preset window provides an interface to create trapping presets The following groups of settings are available Trap width value to specify the overlap for each trap Trap appearance options to control the shape of the trap joins Images options for trapping images Trap threshold values to specify when trapping occurs Be aware that an edge can appear at locations where color planes overlap each other For more information see Print job settings on page 242 Procedure 1 Press System gt Color adjustment gt Trapping presets editor 2 Select one of the available trapping presets 3 Define the trapping settings in the Trap width Trap appearance Images and Trap thresholds panes 4 Click Save as to save the settings and enter a name for the preset 5 Click OK 174 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series Adjust the print quality for media Adjust the print quality for media About print quality for media The print quality of the printed output depends on the media used When you add media to the media catalog you can define attributes that influence the print behavior of the pr
66. required folder on the drive Enter a job name and a file name ID 3 Check the results of your settings in the preview pane 4 64 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Make a scan 9 Touch the start button 10 Touch the eject button and remove the USB drive if applicable Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs 65 imagePRESS C800 Series Use templates for recurring jobs Use templates for recurring jobs The print system offers a number of default templates When you carry out copy or scan jobs with the same settings on a regular basis create custom templates to store the settings for these jobs Original 1 or 2 sided Original type Job name Separator sheets Off Copy job 11 a Auto tesided Auto Portrait left Suppreinion 0 Scheduled jobs Auto Portrait left Zoom i Fit to page Auto Top left Front 0 0 0 100 Back 0 0 0 Margin erase Adjust image Color Black amp white C amp B 0 0 Automatic color det Color 0 0 Folding Trimming Punching Folding None None Punching None MANI o 31 Store settings of a copy or scan job in a template NOTE To change a custom template touch the custom template for two seconds You can rename move or delete the custom template To store the settings of
67. resolution of your Minimum 640 x 480 pixels computer screen Supported web browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 and higher Mozilla Firefox 10 and higher e Google Chrome 17 and higher Apple Safari 6 and higher Language As defined in your browser as long as the printer sup ports this language Chapter 9 References 293 imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor media attributes Settings Editor media attributes When you add new media to the media catalog you need to define the media attributes The f ollowing attributes require special attention Name Use a practical short name without attribute values such as size width and color The Settings Editor automatically adds the attributes to the name Tab sheet Select this check box when the media is tab paper Insert Select this check box when the media is used in the inserter Media family Select the media family that correctly matches the media type Surface type Select the surface that correctly matches the media family 4 Edit the fields below F Name Type l a Size Width 0 1 mm Length 0 1 mm Tab sheet Insert Cycle length Punch count Weight g m Colour Red Media family Surface type Grain direction k Ok Cancel 294 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor settings and information Settings Editor settings and information The Settings Editor provides settin
68. s leveling feet after the machine has been installed If you put weight on the front of the machine while the drawers are pulled out the machine may fall forward To prevent this from happening make sure that the machine s leveling feet are in place e Avoid installing the machine at high altitudes of about 3 000 meters above sea level or higher Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3 000 meters above sea level or higher Select a safe power supply e Plug the machine into an outlet that is 208 V AC 20 A or greater Make sure that the power supply for the machine is safe and has a steady voltage Do not connect other electrical equipment to the same power outlet to which the machine is connected Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip as this may cause a fire or electrical shock The power cord may become damaged if it is stepped on affixed with staples or if heavy objects are placed on it Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an accident such as a fire or electrical shock e The power cord should not be taut as this may lead to a loose connection and cause overheating which could result in a fire If excessive stress is applied to the connection part of the power cord it may damage the power cord or the wires inside the machine may disconnect This could result in a fire Avoid the following situations e Connecting and disconnect
69. scan jobs o Black and white O0 Information bar Color Automatic color de tection a z Fe eS eS None 1 staple 2 staples Top left Left edge Top right Top edge Bottom left Bottom right r Saddle stitch Bottom edge Right edge J Saddle press x None Tri fold in J Tri fold out Parallel fold 248 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Output settings values and icons Print method F Fp Print inside z i Print outside Half fold Z fold Multi half fold Trimming cee 7 tase i gt Ex H None Trim size Finishing size ix a li None 2 holes 3 holes Left Right 4 holes Die set dependent Bottom Chapter 9 References 249 imagePRESS C800 Series Zoom function Zoom function When you start a copy job or scan job you can use the zoom function to reduce or enlarge an image The print system automatically scales the image according to the size of the page To change the zoom factor manually you can use the and buttons of the zoom function When you have originals with a custom paper size you can use the glass plate The zoom function of the automatic document feeder works differently from the zoom function of the glass plate The zoom function in the automatic document feeder The following table shows the zoom of the automa
70. seal that holds the staples togeth er 5 Gently push the staple case into the staple unit as far as possible 6 Close the front cover of the stacker stapler CAUTION When you close the front cover of the stacker stapler be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury 200 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Replace in the professional stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit Replace in the professional stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the staple cartridges need replacing You can find the saddle stitch unit in the stacker stapler 109 Location of the saddle stitch unit O IMPORTANT For information on the Canon genuine staple cartridges see Consumables on page 185 e Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine When you perform a maintenance task such as replace a staple cartridge remove waste or solve jams other machine parts can continue with job process activities Remove the printed output from the booklet tray before you replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit E NOTE We recommend ordering staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out e When a staple cartridge is empty replace both cartridges e Only use staple
71. staple Top right gt J r ka NAV 2 staples Left edge ABC l 2 staples ABC Left edge ABC u Ear a NAU 7 1 staple z 1 staple ABC i Bottom left Ea Top left 2 ABC HI 1 Feet S NA 1 staple Top right Chapter 9 References 251 imagePRESS C800 Series Feed direction for stapling Staple position A4 LTR A3 11 x 17 Orientation Staple setting Orientation Staple setting 2 staples ABC J Left edge z 1 E eE sea 2 staples Right edge Be a eS eens 2 staples a Left edge ABC g i o eF E 2 staples Right edge kg 1 HA S 1 staple 1 staple ES Top right EE Top left ABC BC a H io FT u Ser 1 staple Bottom right gt u Ra A 2 staples Right edge ABC ac Vaal _
72. takes approximately 35 seconds to clean the wires Before you begin Make sure the print system does not process any jobs Procedure 1 Touch System gt Maintenance 2 Touch Start maintenance 3 Enter your maintenance PIN 4 Touch Clean the corona wires 5 Follow the wizard steps 6 Close the menu After you finish NOTE If the procedure displays an engine error contact your local service representative 222 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Clean the main unit rollers Clean the main unit rollers If streaks appear on the printed output clean the roller of the print module The procedure takes approximately one minute Before you begin Make sure the print system does not process any jobs Procedure Touch System gt Maintenance Touch Start maintenance Enter your maintenance PIN Touch Clean the clean roller main unit Follow the wizard steps Close the menu P Ol te Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 223 imagePRESS C800 Series Refresh the fixing belt Refresh the fixing belt O After the print system has printed more than 100 sheets of a specific paper size for example A4 LTR and then prints on a larger paper size for example A3 11 x 17 luster streaks ghost printing can appear on both sides of the paper Refresh the fixing roller to correct this problem You can also perform this procedure when you use heavy or coated
73. the correct layout and quality Below you find an overview of solutions on problems with scan and copy output Prom sottion A scanned page is upside down Place the original with the correct orientation into the auto matic document feeder or on the glass plate and then scan the originals again See Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 59 or Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 61 Every second scanned page is Select the correct original and document layout settings and upside down scan the originals again See Scan job settings on page 240 Copy job settings on page 236 The image position is not cor e Place the originals with the correct orientation into the au rect on all pages tomatic document feeder and then scan the originals again See Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 59 or Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 61 e Select the correct original and document layout settings and scan the originals again See Scan job settings on page 240 Copy job settings on page 236 e Use another application to check the results The information area on the e Select the correct original and document layout settings page is not scaled correctly and scan the originals again See Scan job settings on page 240 Copy job settings on page 236 Use the correct zoom factor See Zoom function on page 250 The information on the page is Select the correct Adjust image settin
74. the first position on the list of scheduled jobs The active job is put on hold e First make a proof print The printed jobs remain in the DocBox folder Make sure you remove printed DocBox jobs on a regular basis to prevent a full system disc P Bi a 0 01 AJD 100g m3 See TopColor White a eh as 0 01 AJD 100g m3 2 37 44PM TopColor White Jobs with available media AL Jobs with label Printed jobs sk New jobs D schedule Jobs Trays system 46 Selection of jobs in a DocBox For more information see DocBox on page 91 Proof and test jobs on page 116 Procedure 1 Touch Jobs gt DocBox 2 Select the DocBox folder that contains the jobs you want to print 3 Enter a PIN if requested 4 Select one or more jobs that you want to print or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple jobs together Touch Print Print now or Proof a Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 95 imagePRESS C800 Series Load and assign media Load and assign media Add temporary media to the media catalog You can print on media that are not part of the media catalog In the printer driver and PRISMAprepare you can specify that the job uses temporary media and the media properties After the job is printed you can add this temporary media to the media catalog in the System view of the control panel This is useful
75. the inserter Procedure 1 Adjust the paper guides to match the media size When you use the lower tray first open the lower tray cover 81 Upper tray 2 Load the paper face up into the inserter When you use the lower tray close the lower tray cover Use the feed instruction when you use preprinted paper See Feed direction for the inserter on page 259 O IMPORTANT Make sure the height of the media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark 85 Lower tray After you finish Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight or high temperatures 148 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load envelopes into the internal paper trays Load envelopes into the internal paper trays When you load envelopes into the internal paper tray use the envelope guide Envelope Feeder Attachment F1 86 Location of the internal paper trays O IMPORTANT The maximum height of a stack of envelopes that you can load into the paper tray is approximately 33 5 mm 1 3 approximately 50 envelopes Make sure you follow the instructions carefully When you do not load the media correctly a paper jam dirty machine parts or poor print quality can occur A CAUTION When you handle paper be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper For more information see Access the print module
76. the last job in a custom template touch the Last used template for two seconds For more information see About copy jobs on page 55 About scan jobs on page 57 Procedure Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan Select one of the available job templates Adjust the template settings Press Save as template Enter a name for the custom template and touch OK Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan to view the new template Or g OLN gt 66 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Copy subsets combined copying Copy subsets combined copying You can combine different subsets of originals into a copy With the optional Page programming function you can define the layout and finishing of each subset For more information see About copy jobs on page 55 Copy job settings on page 236 Use page programming on page 107 Before you begin Read the instructions detailing how to use the automatic document feeder and the glass plate See Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 59 or Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 61 Procedure Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan gt Combined copy job Place the first subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate Define the settings for the subset and the copy Press Scan Place the next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate Define the settings for the subset and the copy Press Scan Repeat step 5
77. the list Of waiting JODS eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeesaaeeeeeseaaeeeneaees 111 FRE POF J OB cee es aoa ws sien eee see ig a ees Ss as all les ta eee eee eevee 112 Send a job to another Printer eeeeeeeceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeeesaaceeeaaaaeeeesaaeeesesaaeeeseeaaeeeseeeeeens 113 Remove print ODS s si iss sees See saad aniran tek oh leh ie ii Aten eel 114 Chapter 5 Print the JODS aa ara aea EE Rra a ERARA Rda Raa 115 Proof geuse aaa a nih aie awe a ete E SRS eee 116 Proof and test prints secwiiiaeiie ee Ais ei idee ed een Ae Ree A EE 116 Make a POOF sccesens weed hv cticets etic i eae Ale Arc ibe aa avs a east ae ga a ante Re eect 118 Printa job 4ICK Ct iis ccis ay ditty eit dere Hae en a en ee Ae eo aa 119 Ke p the systemi Prt Gs inesces cscccces accesses giceccesdeceecsa cde cascade ueas enue dens eadeepns sade teas tada Seinad Ta aide riaan aa aaia 120 System TIOM ILO MING is ce oss ct sedge da se cg eee ee lee peesaszdpadan cee peeedbedeeegeuidteeaceaseadeusasian cid a EENE ETEEN 120 Schedule Pee ee errs eon renter at ener rt io peer T ea ene ee one E pene per recery preter ype tere E eee e 122 Load media for the scheduled JODS eececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteaaeeeeeeaneeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeseneaaeeseneaaeeeeneaeeeeeenaeeeesnaee 125 Check the filling level of the toner CartridQe eecscceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeesesaaeeeeeeeetens 127 Check the filling level of the stap
78. the low power mode when there is no activity during a predefined period You can define this period The system awakes when a job arrives in the list of scheduled jobs or when you use the control panel The control panel has a sleep button to enable the sleep mode You can use the same button to awake the controller from sleep mode During the sleep mode the controller remains on but the control panel light is off The sleep mode will be entered after a timer has expired You can configure the timer in the Settings Editor For more information see System configuration on page 182 Control panel on page 36 Procedure Press the sleep button M at the right hand side of the control panel 2 Press the sleep button again to awake the system 192 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Refill toner and staples Refill toner and staples Replace a toner cartridge The dashboard of the control panel indicates if a toner cartridge needs replacing Toner cartridges come in four colors black cyan magenta and yellow You find the toner cartridges in the print module When a toner cartridge becomes empty during a print job the print process resumes after you replace the toner cartridge T T _ I o o 105 Location of the toner cartridges A WARNING Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames This can cause toner ignition which may r
79. the original influences the sta ple fold and punch location in the printed out put See Feed direction on page 251 3 Gently close the automatic document feeder CAUTION To prevent damage to the glass plate and personal injury carefully close the cover and do not push on to the cover 4 Define the copy or scan settings and touch Start CAUTION Be aware that the light of the glass plate is very bright 5 Remove the original from the glass plate For more information see Automatic document feeder on page 41 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs 61 imagePRESS C800 Series Use the glass plate to copy or scan Paper input specifications on page 270 Feed direction on page 251 62 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Make a copy Make a copy You start a copy job from the automatic document feeder or the glass plate When the scan area has scanned the originals the copy goes to the destination you indicated 1 or 2 sided Original 1 Auto 1 sided Auto Portrait left Background Fe Suppression 0 Do 3 Number of sets 1 Job name Copy job 11 Destination Scheduled jobs Auto Portrait left Normal Fit to page 100 Auto Top left Front 0 0 0 Back 0 0 0 Print delivery
80. thickness set 120 127 V AC 50 60 Hz 8A Maximum 500 W 800 mm x 792 mm x 1 239 mm 31 1 2 x 31 1 4 x 48 3 4 Approximately 180 kg 397 Ib Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Punch hole distances of punch units for Finisher AM1 and Saddle Finisher AM2 144 Puncher Unit BT1 80 mm 3 1 8 145 Puncher Unit BS1 Staple Finisher T1 Description Stacker stapler with offset stacking stapling folding and punch ing Paper size for stacking Location lower tray upper tray top tray Default sizes 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R A5R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR Custom sizes 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 4 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Envelope types ISO C5 162 mm x 229 mm 6 3 8 x 9 No 10 COM 104 7 mm x 241 3 mm 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Monarch 98 4 mm x 190 5 mm 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 DL 110 mm x 220 mm 4 1 3 x 8 2 3 Nagagata 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Yougatanaga 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Kakugata 2 240 mm x 332 mm 9 1 2 x 13 Custom size envelopes 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Paper size for stapling Location lower tray Default sizes A3 A4 A4R 11 x 17 LTR LTRR Paper size for punching Location lower tray upper tray External 2 3 Hole Puncher C1
81. to collect booklets Auxiliary booklet tray to collect large booklets Lower tray to collect finished output Upper tray to collect finished output o ON Q A Top tray to collect finished output See for specifications Finishing and delivery specifications on page 274 Finishing for your output on page 23 Chapter 2 Explore the print system 45 imagePRESS C800 Series Professional puncher Professional puncher P O The professional puncher Professional Puncher C1 and Professional Puncher Integration Unit A1 uses die sets to punch various types of holes in the printed output The Professional Puncher Integration Unit A1 reverses the punched sheets NOTE For more information on how to use the professional puncher see the operation guide of the Professional Puncher C1 IMPORTANT Always keep the main power switch of the Professional Puncher C1 in the I position 19 Professional puncher integration unit Professional Puncher Integration Unit A1 Ej Description professional puncher integration unit 1 Front cover to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs See for specifications Finishing and delivery specifications on page 274 Finishing for your output on page 23 46 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Folder Folder The folder Paper Folding Unit F1 folds the printed output in various ways Z fold half fold tri fold in tri fold ou
82. workflow and an overview of useful functions Chapter 2 In the next chapters you can find instructions that detail how to prepare submit plan and print jobs in Chapter 3 4 and 5 Please read the media handling instructions carefully To keep the image quality high it is important to read the calibration information and the instructions detailing how to adjust the color and media quality Chapter 6 Maintenance instructions teach you how to keep the print system clean and the performance high Chapter 7 When you encounter problems you can find some useful solutions for common problems Chapter 8 The reference chapter provides you with topics and detailed information and specifications about your product and the product supplies Chapter 9 Other product information On the downloads site downloads oce com you can find the following product information e Separate operation guides for the print system and system accessories Separate reference guides for the product Separate safety guides for the print system and system accessories Third party software overview Guides on the use of optionals This operation guide includes the functions and descriptions of the following finishing optionals Document Insertion Unit M1 Professional Puncher C1 and Professional Puncher Integration Unit A1 Paper Folding Unit F1 e Finisher AM1 Saddle Finisher AM2 Puncher Unit BS1 e Staple Finisher T1 Booklet Fin
83. 297 AaB 100 gfm2 Top 4 Stacker stapler lowe ag Binding Trimming P i 8 Gx E ik re Le ae Method 2 staples Punching None Ready Cancel Location Left edge 57 Page Programming When you have copied or scanned with subsets you can start with these subsets Use the settings in the Output pane for the page ranges and subsets The following table shows easy to use page programming tasks Task Procedure Select a subset Press Split Select the first page of the new subset Split a subset on gt Add a page to a page range or sub 1 Select the subset or page range set 2 Touch Insert to add a page before or after a page range or subset Delete parts of jobs 1 Select the subset or page range 2 Touch Delete to delete the subset or page range Select parts of jobs 1 Touch Select to select page ranges or subsets ac cording to a criteria for example specific media Combine and split subsets 1 Select the subsets to combine 2 Touch Merge to create the new subset Use Split to get the individual subsets Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 107 imagePRESS C800 Series Use page programming Task Procedure Change finishing settings 1 Select the subsets which must apply the same finish ing settings 2 Touch Merge finishing and select the subset to use the finishing settings Use Split finishing to use the original finishing set tings
84. 297 mm x 432 mm 10 1 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 297 1 mm x 182 mm 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm 11 7 x 7 2 12 x 18 Paper weight 60 325 g m 16 Ib bond 120 Ib cover Stacking capacity for stack Upper tray ing 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R A5R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR 1 000 sheets or 147 mm 5 79 Lower tray A4 2 000 sheets or 285 mm 11 22 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTTR 1 000 sheets or 147 mm 5 79 Upper tray lower tray when high volume stacking is on A4 4 000 sheets or 490 mm 19 29 A4R LTRR 2 000 sheets or 285 mm 11 22 A3 11 x 17 1 500 sheets or 216 mm 8 5 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 1 000 sheets or 147 mm 5 79 Chapter 9 References 277 imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Stacking capacity for sta Location lower tray pling A4 LTR 3 000 sheets 200 sets or 423 mm 16 65 A4R LTRR 2 000 sheets 200 sets or 285 mm 11 22 A3 1 500 sheets 200 sets or 216 mm 8 5 Maximum stapling capacity A4 LTR 100 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond or below 11 mm 0 43 A3 A4R 11 x 17 LTRR 50 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond or below 5 5 mm 0 22 Stacking capacity for fold Location upper tray lower tray ing Z fold 30 sheets or 10
85. 300 g m 28 Ib bond 110 Ib cover Matte coated 106 g m 300 g m 28 Ib bond 110 Ib cover SEN _ Textured 80 g m 300 g m 22 Ib bond 110 Ib cover Vellum 64 g m 105 g m 17 Ib bond 28 Ib cover 2 NINN NIN NINN lt Transparency 151 g m 180 g m 40 Ib bond 66 Ib cover 3 Recycled 64 g m 105 g m 17 Ib cover 28 Ib cover Color 64 g m 90 g m 17 Ib cover 24 Ib cover Prepunched 64 g m 90 g m 17 Ib cover 24 Ib cover NINN SNN NIS NS NNN AANS SNN NIS NIS NNS S NNS NEON NE NNN NEN AINS NINS Chapter 9 References 289 imagePRESS C800 Series Supported media types for paper input optionals Media type Internal pa Special Bulk paper Paper mod Inserter per tray feeder module ule Tab paper 151 g m 220 g m 40 Ib cover 81 Ib cover x4 Labels 5 151 g m 180 g m 40 Ib cover 66 Ib cover Bond 64 g m 105 g m 17 Ib cover 28 Ib cover Letterhead 151 g m 180 g m 40 Ib cover 66 Ib cover Carbonless 52 g m 63 g m 14 Ib cover 17 Ib cover NINS Envelope SSNS SN SH SN N NN SE NINN IN NEON EAI ANN 1 Supported media weight for internal paper tray 106 g m 220 g m 28 Ib bond 81 Ib cover 2 Some types of vellums are not supported 3 Use only A4 A4R LTR LTRR transparencies 4 Use with Tab feeding attachment 5 Use with Envelope
86. 36 POCONOS AT 71 SCAN JODScisicsisedscetiteceiseteadsletisedesaeveasecetndernensads 240 Perfect binder Originals commercial NAME 33 grouping N COPY SUDSES sscsecseerereereeseees 67 location arena a 33 grouping in scan subsets 68 Perfect binding requirements for automatic document feeder COIN Sess e a S 24 59 Pint jobs requirements for glass plate see 61 Pil Nha eann n a 99 Output location Placement originals COPY JO S snsssnsssissrsesisesnnesnnnrnnnntnnntnnnnnnennnen nee 237 Glass 0 1 eae noe ee ee 61 print SCtthNG ccceecesssssteeeeeeeessssssneeeeeeeees 243 Power switch Output tray Print MOdUIe ii Avastin A ier Bene 228 commercial NAMEC L cccccccceeesssssttteeeeeeeesssssnneees 33 Prepress staff PAIS esseseeseseseeseeseesessesneseeseesesnesneseseeseenennenneey 48 taskon aea en a RE 29 Output Print job production TOMOVING ccctscccceeeesssenneeeeeeessssenaeeeeeeessssenaaeees 155 AUTOMated WoOrkflOWScecececccccccccccceececccceeeececeeeee 70 settings and VAIUCS seesecsereereeseeseereneeseeees 246 ROTC ICES cseiiaicosiininediastiaeinasienaulieunlamaatioen 70 c 0 amp 8 pee e eRe eee eee eee ee ee E NEEE ENEN EAEEREN 158 IN job WOrKfIOW sesesessesseeeseeeeeseteteesestsesesesenens 28 309 imagePRESS C800 Series Index Media ASSIGNMENL cceeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeeeees 125 PDF VT fI1CS ceeeeceeetee cence eeeeeeeeaeeteteeeeeeeeenaeens 71 Print jobs bundling waiting JODS
87. 5 Wserthe power MOS c2icsicceciesectecehiecticase ree ee eee eee i ee ie ee een 189 T ri ON the print SYStOMM siecccpisleed saci dev see cca heee olatyadhs AO A aaa eaea Eae EE 189 Turn off the print System ih secd cel tie ce ee ne ae te sedges degenerates edeebeeeeticivs 190 Restart the print SYSteM 2s 0 sees aes wii ce eee de a ee dd dh ed ee ee 191 Use the nergy Save MODS sizesicesseccecesccccseesccepen sheen censctes tevedees anain akaa aapi a panini iii 192 Refill tomer and st pl Sicinius cessesiecxseceidecsceceicesdeeeie scdentevscens tevectentansic iene susescte svcd cnesstetetesaietessieiess 193 Replace a tomer CartridQe eceeccccesscceeeeesceeeeeneceeeeeaaeeeessaece ees aaeeeeesaaeeeseaaaeeesaaaaeeeeaaaeeseeaaeeeeenaaeseneeaeeees 193 Replace the waste toner CONtAINGL cccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeaaaeseaaeesesaaeeseeaaeesesaeeeeneaaes 196 Replace in the professional stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit 199 Replace in the professional stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit 201 Replace in the standard stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the staple Unit eseeeeee 204 Replace in the standard stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit 0008 207 Remove the staple Waste cccccccecscceeeesseceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeesaaeeeeesaaeeeeaaaaeeeesaaeeeeeaaaeeseeeaaeeeeseaaesenenaeeees 209 Remove in t
88. 6 using shorter NAMES seers ieee reeset 84 features and benefits ssscssssssesesesesesenesevenes 30 Job planning media COMPOCH ONS viaiessiniarccnsviciscaivtneccessacisicns 177 n job WOrkFIOW sssssteeesssteeessstteeesnnteeeesniteeesanns 28 printer OVER acco cece adned 50 mMecia Asagena a PRISHWIA pre pate iaatcatecratiencmiieneueny 52 Job preparation skew and rotation adjustments 179 automated WOrkflOW ccceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 70 Media family from USB rive tees tteeeessitteeesaaey 54 calibrati Marsissa 160 308 imagePRESS C800 Series Index CescriptiOnsacieiiseisasirisaais ainsi 26 27 P Media registration POIPOFMING 2 ee eeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesnaeeeeesnaees 177 Rage Programming Media changing settings in queue 106 107 COPY JODS iccseeiseaieiaaiss dee ld iaiia 67 SSSI OMIM tO JOHS a TUNGHONS s 222 cc ceece eee sctnes ees naira 244 ele damento PAPAN ALAS eiiiai at WIGCOMS Caz ccadeses czedeace coe 2cce cneeccesctennecd na 35 AtTtIDUTCS eeeecceeteeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeesesneeeeeeeeeees 21 Seip se are ecteeat esata deg rac natceeae 68 checking and preparing before loading 130 h Page size COBY JODE iiipin aii Ea SCAM ODS oinen e ea 240 fanNiN Giersi nae aa eaen aa 130 f Poe Paper input module Heeling iiid aa tec peiate tee as SPOCIFICATIONS ccceceeecceeeeenceeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeaees 272 ORIN G isaste a 185 A Paper Input OV SIVIOW OF SUBD ONGC media Ty
89. 7 mm x 241 3 mm 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Monarch 98 4 mm x 190 5 mm 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 DL 110 mm x 220 mm 4 1 3 x 8 2 3 Nagagata 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Yougatanaga 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Kakugata 2 240 mm x 332 mm 9 1 2 x 13 Paper weight 52 300 g m2 14 Ib bond 110 Ib cover Features Paper level indication visual Automatic tray opening Power requirement 120 127 V AC 60 Hz 3 1 A Power consumption Maximum 880 W Dimensions unit WxDxH 950 mm x 797 mm x 1040 mm 37 3 8 x 31 3 8 x 41 Weight unit Approximately 155 kg 342 Ib POD Deck Lite B1 Description Optional single tray bulk paper module Paper trays 1 x 3 500 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond 1 x 4 000 sheets 64 g m 17 Ib bond Paper size Default sizes 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R A5R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR Custom sizes including envelopes 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Envelope types ISO C5 162 mm x 229 mm 6 3 8 x 9 No 10 COM 104 7 mm x 241 3 mm 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Monarch 98 4 mm x 190 5 mm 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 DL 110 mm x 220 mm 4 1 3 x 8 2 3 Nagagata 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Yougatanaga 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Kakugata 2 240 mm 332 mm 9 1 2 x 13 Paper weight 64 300 g m 17 Ib bond 110 Ib cover Paper feed technology e Friction feed e Air separation 272 Chapter 9 Referen
90. ACCOUNTING MOE ccccececceeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeetaeee eee naeeeeneaeeee ee saaeeeeaaaeee ees aaeeeseaaaeeesecaseeeeseaeeeenenaeeeenae 80 Change or disable the warning tiMe ccecceceeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee teense eeeaaeeeeeaaeeseeeaaeeseneaaeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeneeaae 82 Change the system languag yiisitidn teeth eric eee dle eed eae eee 83 Use of shorter job NaMe Saen naasa aa Ee aaa E a edad Gnade lade hae peta eset 84 Adjust the readability of the control panel ssssssssssssssssssssssrsssrsnnssrnnnsrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 85 Use the remote MONnItOhix uc eed ane ae aan eee ates EEEa 86 Transaction PrimN asp nnne eaer aoi ia a aoa Ea EOE Ea EREN aaa eats 87 Print in transaction printing MOCEC ccececceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeeasaaeeesaaeeeeesaeeesesaaeeeeseeeeees 90 Usethe DocBOX oiei ae heee eE cc gee e a a As fe ae fae dae Se eee a ee ee 91 Daf 3 gt Cire r perp ere CRr er ee rereee reer a Ea pet creer err pert repre rPrer ect reer cree rere peer rere rece sere EE rect reer a A aE 91 Change a DocBox Obia22 2200248 een Saab a neni eee nan eR aie 92 Combine DocBox JODSx2 a5 ianei deci aah eh wha eine ew ek awe AA nes 93 Lock DocBox Job s ttingS 14 2 06 2 iiok ale ANAeN AAG NABH Haha SRA eA HRAA Nd win ee 94 Print DocBox ODS wcitiy cence ea as tiered eh ee A ee td a a ice 95 Load and assign MEI ais see cesssctecasstieecaacdeencesdeeens ys deca sietcnnssheicenaat losis sativens nab
91. C 43300 95m 3 Pro Gloss 115 A3 Pro Silk 155 4 100 gsm A4 160 gsm A4250 gsm A460 95m A4 Colored 60 A4 Parchment Gold 150 A4 Parchment Sand 150 Banner blue Banner cyan Banner red Banner yellow SPAS 155 gsm SRAI Digisulphate2S0 SRA3TC Plus Gloss 115 OD ee ee eee Oooo SRA3TC Plus Gloss 300 C SRasTop color 100 MAW AAA AAA AAA sao J SRA3Top Color 160 Tab Indent 2 5 mm Cydie 5 155g m2 Tabs 100g m2 Color copy 200g m2 Color copy 300g m2 Color copy 115 g m2 Digital Coated 155g m2 Digital Coated 100g m2 Top Color 160g m2 Top Color 250g m2 Top Color 60 g m2 Thin 80g m2 Colored paper 150 g m2 Specialties 150 g m2 Specialties 100g m2 Plain 100 g m2 Plain 100g m2 Plain 100 g m2 Plain 155 g m2 TopColor 250 g m2 Specialties 115g m2 Offset Coated 300g m2 Offset Coated 100g m2 Top Color 160g m2 Top Color White White White White white White Red Cyan Red Yellow White White White White White White Preprinted Thickness 0 102 mm 0 100 mm 0 200 mm 0 250 mm 0 102 mm 0 100 mm 0 100 mm 0 100 mm 0 100 mm 0 402 mm 0 100 mm 0 102 mm 0 102 mm 0 100 mm 0 100 mm 0 100 mm 0 100 mm 0 102 mm 0 100 mm 0 100 mm 0 102 mm 0 100 mm 0 102 mm I Assignto whole sheet s 20 G PiGORO sm so 16 Pages 1 selected 9 sheets 1 selected Page size A4 25 The media catalog in PRISMAprepare 5 Select the required color preset 6
92. Color adjustment gt Printer calibration details gt Shading correction 2 Follow the instructions on the control panel 4 Perform media family calibration See Ca ibrate the media family on page 163 After you finish When the shading correction produces a density not within required range error perform a correction procedure for this error See Fix density not within required range error on page 233 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high 165 imagePRESS C800 Series Adjust the color quality Adjust the color quality About image and color adjustments Daily printer calibration and media family calibration result in calibrated CMYK curves You can perform a manual adjustment of the CMYK curves on job level or on system level Perform an automatic color mismatch correction when PRISMAsync does not execute the color alignment in the correct way Reduce unwanted white edges between color planes with a trapping preset Correct slight color deviations in the color tones with the automatic correction color tone ACCT function For more information see Adjust CMYK curves for all jobs on page 169 Adjust CMYK curves for a single job on page 167 Automatic color mismatch correction on page 171 Create a trapping preset on page 174 Register the color tones for the ACCT function on page 172 Correct the color tones with the ACCT function on page 173 About calibration on page 160 Problem Solving on page 230
93. Creation and definition of the DocBox Workflow gt DocBox SA folders Hotfolder creation and hotfolder connec Workflow gt Hotfolders SA tion to an automated workflow Other printers to send jobs to Workflow gt Remote printers SA The printers become available on the con trol panel and in PRISMAsync remote manager LPR print path Configuration gt Connectivity SA Socket printing Configuration gt Connectivity SA 296 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor settings and information Settings and information Location Role Print workflow Preferences gt System settings KO receiving RIP printing Fonts Workflow gt Fonts SA PRISMAsync remote manager Settings and information Location Role Enable PRISMAsync remote manager Preferences gt System settings SA default enabled Printers to manage with PRISMAsync re Workflow gt Remote Manager SA mote manager PRISMAsync remote manager runs from a master PRISMAsync controller Only the master controller requires the list of print ers that are managed by PRISMAsync re mote manager Scan workflows Settings and information Location Scan to file configuration Configuration gt Connectivity SA FTP server Scan to email configuration Configuration gt Connectivity SA SMTP server LDAP server Default sender name Configuration gt Connectivity SA Maximum attachment
94. D Preparation eeceeesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeees 52 PRISMAsync remote manager descr ptlonisncicnnne einen 101 PRISMAsync ACCOUNTING 2 eeeeeeceeeeeeecee iii iisi 80 color INFOFMATION 0 2 ee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 266 color MANAGEMENL cccceeeceeeeeeeteeteeeteeteeenees 26 CONTON O ascents paisa 32 TEALUGES is acenceicdcecans siebecciedesaads shesbitecdevasausesegitecs cs 28 job ManageMeNt ccceecceeeeeeteeeeeneeeees 73 99 JOD WOrkKPIOW eceeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeenees 28 Media ASSIGNMENL cceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeaes 30 Media CatalOg ccccescsceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeees 30 Operating CONCEPL ccceeeeceeeesseeeeeesteeeeeeneeees 28 task Splittih Ges sicece tect ite Hs a 29 workflow PFOfileS eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 73 Problems and solutions optimizing scan quality 232 OVO PV IG W saisiko ignon anaa 230 Professional puncher integration unit p tsin E A 46 Professional puncher commercial NaMe sssssssessesssrirsrrrsrerrrrerrrenee 33 lOCAT O hiii isrdike enin dinadine arans n sasear 33 PAIS eisieu peana aa aa A 46 specificationS ssssssssessssresssrnnssirnrnrrnnerinnnenen 274 Professional punching OPUONS 022 0 ceed tener naiiai 24 Proof print for testing the jOD eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeetees 116 Punch hole distances SPECIFICATIONS cccsseceeeesseettteeeeeeeeeeseees 281 285 Punch unit loca
95. Description inserter 1 2 3 4 5 Upper tray to place media Lower tray to place media Lower tray cover to access the lower tray Slides guide to place the media in the correct position in the tray Front cover to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs See Paper input specifications on page 270 for specifications 40 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Automatic document feeder Automatic document feeder The automatic document feeder Duplex Color Image Reader Unit H1 enables you to copy or scan a set of originals The automatic document feeder scans both sides of the originals at the same time 12 Automatic document feeder Duplex Color Image Reader Unit H1 x Description automatic document feeder 1 Cover to access the original feed path when a paper jam occurs 2 Originals input indicator to indicate that originals are in the automatic document feeder Originals tray to place the originals Auxiliary originals tray to place large originals A3 11 x 17 Auxiliary originals receiving tray to collect scanned large originals Originals receiving tray to collect scanned originals Paper guides to place the originals in the correct position in the tray oOo N ona A OUO Originals output indicator to indicate that the automatic document feeder scans the originals 9 Scan area where the automatic document feeder scans the originals 10 Glass plate
96. ESS C800 Series Control panel fae Description control panel 8 System button to access system functions features and overviews such as Maintenance information on supplies and finishers Maintenance procedures and system shut down Control panel adjustments Local key operator settings Media catalog and temporary media Color adjustments and calibration procedures Transaction printing settings 9 Dashboard to display information such as Color bar to indicate the system status with a color Progress of the print process Scheduled operation tasks Warnings and errors Status indicators of toner cartridges staple cartridges and waste containers Calibration notifications You can also view the dashboard remotely with the remote monitor See Remote monitor specifications on page 288 10 Status LED to indicate the system status with a color See System monitoring on page 120 imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 2 Explore the print system 37 Paper Input Paper Input Paper module The print module has three internal paper trays with a total capacity of 1 650 sheets See Access the print module parts on page 228 The paper module Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 increases the input capacity of the print system Each paper tray can hold up to 2 000 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond or 64 g m 17 Ib bond 9 Paper module Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 i Description paper module 1 Front cover to access
97. Example 2 50 A4 sheets 4 A3 sheets 1 A3 Z fol 50 A4 sheets 7 A3 Z folded sheets 120 ded sheet 68 gt stapling is possible gt stapling is not possible Half fold Orientation for the Half fold option Folded output Glass plate Automatic document feeder 128 Leading edge length 1 and feed direction 2 ED y Tri fold in The Tri fold in option folds paper to make it suitable for envelopes The paper gets the shape of acC Chapter 9 References 257 imagePRESS C800 Series Feed direction for folding Orientation for the Tri fold in option Folded output Glass plate Automatic document feeder i HES 2 129 Leading edge length 1 and i A B Cc feed direction 2 Tri fold out The Tri fold out option folds paper to make it suitable for envelopes The paper is folded in the shape of a Z Orientation for the Tri fold out option Folded output Glass plate Automatic document feeder i Em 130 Leading edge length 1 and feed direction 2 ABC Parallel fold The Parallel fold option folds the paper in four equal parts Orientation for the Parallel fold option Folded output Folded
98. Index COPY JODS ii sesstintivsitaveeiiten diets 237 238 244 for testing the jOD eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeetees 116 Print Setti Gessica 243 workflow profile sssssssssesssesesrirsssrsnnssrnnesrenens 76 Check and print workflow profile CESCLIPTION ccccceeeeseeetteeeeeeeeessenaeeeeeeessssenaneees 76 Cleaning tasks ANd PrOoCECUleS cccccesssssseeeeeeeeseeees 214 CMYK values adjusting for a single job c eee 167 adjusting for all jODS ccccccccccsessssseeeeeeeeees 169 Color control bar Advanced color management 27 print Setting eici oaa 243 Color depth Print SettiN gesinnen 243 SCAN JODS enii iana ad 241 Color management CAlIDatiON cccccccccecssssssseeeeeeeessessneeeeeeeeseeeee 160 CODY JODS esris isinen ninanais 240 perform media family calibration 163 perform printer Calibration 162 print OPCratOl eecceeseceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeteeeees 26 PRISMASYNC eeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeetees 26 SCAN JODS ccccceeeeeeseseeeteeeeeeeesseseneeeeeeeeesesee 240 SYSTEM AAMINIStratOF cccceeeesseeeteeeeeeeees 26 task splittinGicsien icon eek ue knees 26 transaction printing MOdE c cette 87 Color mapping CescriptiOn visita ie eins 267 Color mappings Advanced color management 27 Color preset CESCLIPTION ccecececeeseeeetteeeeeeeessesetaeeeeeeesssssnaaeees 26 printer driver cis acca wann adc we es 50 PRISMA pre
99. M ses ers oier Sheecces teuseceett savin sTiaeeetetearaesaas 32 m dia Catalog iiinis 30 e Ai ast een 36 SChedull sii ihe aia 122 temporary Media sssessssssssrressrrrerrrnnerrnnserenes 21 transaction printing MOde s sssssssssiesssrsssnes 88 Copy job CESCrIPtON wiscssteceinesinstte eds cine ene cbleieabeentienie as 55 destinatiOn c sesiideandaetiinen tect 55 templates anaiai 55 Copy jobs combined Copy jOD ccccscceeeeeseceeeeseeeeeeeeee 67 last minute SCttiNGS ccceeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 242 optimizing scan quality 232 page PFOGFAMMING cccccceessssetteeeeeeeesssssnneeeees 67 SOU GS ET 236 start COPY JODidsien cee eek he 63 starting at automatic document feeder 59 Starting at glass Plate cecesssssteeeeeeeeeeeee 61 SUDDSCUS oirinn aN anaxiieneuiee 67 CODY Lo E E oiitinh tania nk tained 113 Corona assembly wires cleaning procedure sssssssssssssrsssrirssrrirssrnens 222 Correction automatic color mismatch c ceeee 171 curled output MEIAa L cccccecesesstteeeeeeeeeeees 176 skewed and rotated iMages eseeeeeee 179 Counters resetting and reading ccceeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 226 Covers COPY JODS aiar a EE 236 print sSetting ssesssssssesessresesrirnrrrnrnrrrnrnrrrnnnrrnnnne 242 Curled output media COrrector iironde 176 D Daily maintenance for operator tasks ee e r e aE 183 Dashboard 306 imagePRESS C800 Series Index Cescriptionicici seine
100. N ceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeetennaaeeeneas 59 Use the glass plate to COPY OF SCANL ccccsscceeesenceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeesenaaeeeseaaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeesesnaeeetenaees 61 Makea CO pykina npo ensctnegaccersesazancenpevecgaeesccesesvaezeivavasvesnaeeteiusvdeess suet dao annarai aeon 63 Make a SCAN esac cgesecscanscescesnsiee cpa tattensdesceeeddvsate ntgdeieecadnsadeatiecdecausn aiia atte din ai aangaf ninpa aE eanan 64 Use templates for recurring JODS ccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeee ee eaeeeeeaaeeeetaaeeeeeaaeeeesaaaesegeaaaeeeeecaeeeeeenaeeeeee 66 Copy subsets combined COPYING ececceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeee ee aaeeeeeaaeeeeseaaeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeesensaeeeeeenaeeeenea 67 Scan subsets combined SCANNING ecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaaeeeeaaaeeeesaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeseesnaeeeenas 68 imagePRESS C800 Series Contents Chapter 4 Pl n TUM ONS cso aaa at sess e eee eno adie ne eee 69 Set up your print Production PrefereNnCesS ccccccceeseceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeeesaaeeseeeaaeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeennaaes 70 Automated WorltlowWs ission ein ae i ea Ee A ee eden 70 WOrkflOW POTS cc cccescsccaceszectecesieceesesSecbenesbedenshaccbarpadedensiacts candace a aa abaia aaa baaa aSa TS Select a workflow Profile eececceceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeee eee eaaeeeeaaaeeeeaaaeeeeaaaaeeeesaaeeeseaaeeesesaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeenee 79 Select an
101. Operation guide imagePRESS C800 Series Copyright Copyright CANON INC 2014 No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Canon Inc Edition 2014 10 Contents Contents Chapter 1 Prefata aE EE ia stab ogame eenecaavives 7 DISCIAINIGNS siete no eli alee ae ete ee et de eee ee 8 MEPS RNS oo essa os each eden is oh Sea vcs Ses Sak Ses eats beri a a AE a wehadeestvtadiceedvee detest 9 Notes for the reade is scc 2 2 cscct och vencdst pe ceedectedhedekeetl bdeeeil pick eneledeepacisivbsacnpeneeuivde intel ara Rana 11 Installation preGaUtiOns 2c t c vie onic cet A eee el dhe a de ed ML aa 12 Handling PreCautions cccccccceescceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeesaeee ee saeeeeesaaeeeeeaaaaeeeaaaaaeeeaaaeeeeesaaeeeeaaaaeeeaaaeeesesaeeeseseaaeeseneaaes 16 Information in this Operation QUICC cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeeesnaeeeeesneeeeeenaaees 18 Chapter 2 Explore the print SV SU CIN cescicaciescccdeccnsaceecetaaanaiscnccesecensancenedaactheacacensantensiacbensbiactoanaeasaecbass 19 What can this print system dO fOr YOU cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeessaeeeeesaaeeeeeaaaaeeeesaaeeseseaaeeeeeeaseseneeaeeees 20 What olltput can yo
102. RESS C800 Series Workflow profiles Standard workflow profile i I iti Job planning Waiting 3 DocBox i jobs i Scheduled jobs Print production Finishing and delivery E Printing E Media loading The standard workflow profile fits a productive workflow with sufficient control over jobs Jobs go to the list of scheduled jobs and the print system prints the jobs The print system selects another output tray for each next job 74 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Workflow profiles Job by job workflow profile Waiting Job planning jobs Print production E Finishing and delivery E Printing E Media loading The job by job workflow profile fits a workflow in which every job needs attention All jobs come in the list of scheduled jobs and you start the jobs one by one from the list of scheduled jobs The print system selects another output tray for each next job Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 75 imagePRESS C800 Series Workflow profiles Check and print workflow profile I wah lannin Waiting Job pla g l jobs ee e Scheduled jobs Print production 1 Finishing and delivery E Printing E Media loading The check and print workflow profile is suitable for a workflow in which every job requires attention You check the print quality and layout setting of the first set All jobs are received in the list of scheduled jobs and only the first se
103. S ecsceeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeseseaaeeeeseaeeeeneeeees 149 Load tab paper into the internal Paper trayS ceececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeeeseaaeeeesaeeeeeeaaes 152 SLOP PMU vss secs acest Soc desde pelea peeeeehene E N eed etaceixeeteeedede 154 Remove printed output from the stacker Stapler cecccceeseceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeesesaaeeeseeeeeens 155 Store the printed OUtDUtE need aie ote ae sh oda AAR An SAA ek le 158 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality WiQMssiiicsisscisssssiiinrinesntrstsitnincssiisnnia nannies 159 Calibration ann E a eee tei hee 160 About calibrato ha a hen iaeelend a E a Ea a a depeda need oad eee 160 Calibrate the printe fs 20 cis devs are en ean dn Ahn Bian aU SESA daea iai Andani tas 162 Calibrate the media familyasini eiiie aisead ada daaa ed eee eens ieee tee 163 Calibrate for maximum print QUALITY cece eeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaaeeeeaaaeeeeaaeeseaaaeeeesaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaes 165 Adjust the Color G Uality sipsipan pnn pora nid a Ana iaai a aaa iaaa eneeteaneaet 166 About image and color adjustments cccccccececsceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeesaaaeeeeeaaeeseneaaeeseeeaaeeenee 166 Adjust CMYK curves for a single JOb ssssssssssssssssssrsssssnnsssnnnsrinnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn annann nenna 167 Adjust CMYK curves for all JO DSksisounoninnire mpe n apap aia aaa a eiA 169 Automatic colo
104. TONE Color Data and or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of insert appropriate name of Licensed Materials Xerox is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST under license from Monotype Imaging Inc UFST is a trademark of Monotype Imaging Inc registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions UFST Copyright 1989 1996 1997 2003 2004 2008 all rights reserved by Monotype Imaging Inc Apple AppleTalk EtherTalk LocalTalk Mac Macintosh Mac OS and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows Server Internet Explorer Excel and PowerPoint are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Portions of this software are copyright 2007 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Copyright C 1999 2000 2002 Aladdin Enterprises All rights reserved a Java POWERED Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Ca Adobe PostScript 3 Adobe PostScript and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and
105. a aa Aaa Aaea aeaea aparada aaa 96 Add temporary media to the media Catalog cccccccceeesseceeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeseaeeeeescaeeeeesneeeeeeenaees 96 Assign media tO a paper tLAY ceeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeee eee eaee eee ae eset aaeee eta aaeeeeeaaaeeeseaaeee ee aseeeesaseeensaeeeenaae 97 Manage the jobs in the QUCUC esceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaee ee eaaeeeenaaaeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaseseesaaseseneaaeeeeneneneeeas 99 Job Management in the QUCUES ccccceeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeeeesaaeeeeaaaeeeeesaaeeesesaaeeeeesaeeeeesnaeeeeeeaees 99 View the jobs in the queuesiicices facsciedatecii detach helenae chase NEAR aR EAE ENEEK Ri 102 Bundle Jobs 2e00 erat eisai erat dna an ay atavi Abani dk ee een AL ee de 103 Add extra sheets toa JOD ic cevcess cack sac tecc eee ohne des ete cased ee vene ee ev ds ee eee ed cepa cee ee dc pve eee ce 105 CHANGE OD SCUINGS o5 ceces ccc ceccsscs nace secentecste sed eedie cadncaden ches baceaiuediea id sdaneddeed inseuecicsennceiendeseniesensetiensibereegas 106 Use page PrOGraMMING asrorini seateceesvarcbed sate ranateceede adsdddenssuedencaheideatnd steno eee 107 Printa Wealtiin OD vos oc sccc seeks ced cecegc iiiaae annaia hte enaa aeaaea Ra aaia vae cst escbce ta saben bie cbbcaghbbivacedbeeradtbaes 109 Print a scheduled job immMedciately cccccceecsceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeesnaeeeensneeeesenaaees 110 Move a scheduled job to
106. a fire IMPORTANT Some commercially available paper types are not suited to this printer Contact your local authorized Canon dealer when you need to purchase paper To prevent moisture buildup tightly wrap remaining paper in its original package for storage NOTE For high quality prints use paper recommended by Canon If a message asking you to replace the toner cartridge appears on the touch panel display replace the used toner cartridge with a new one Toner comes in four colors black cyan magenta and yellow Check the toner color that you need to replace before ordering toner from your local authorized Canon dealer Also when replacing the toner cartridge make sure that you replace toner of the correct color Use only toner cartridges intended for use with this machine For optimum print quality using Canon genuine toner is recommended imagePRESS C800 Series Canon imagePRESS Toner T01 Black Canon imagePRESS Toner T01 Cyan Canon imagePRESS Toner T01 Magenta Canon imagePRESS Toner T01 Yellow Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 185 imagePRESS C800 Series Consumables 1 black toner cartridge 2 cyan magenta or yellow toner cartridge WARNING Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames as this may cause toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite resulting in burns or a fire Do not store toner cartridges in places exposed to open flames as this may cause the toner to igni
107. achine There is a danger of ignition 16 Chapter 1 Preface imagePRESS C800 Series Handling precautions This machine generates a slight amount of ozone etc during normal use Although sensitivity to ozone etc may vary this amount is not harmful Ozone etc may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs especially in poorly ventilated rooms It is recommended that the room be appropriately ventilated sufficient to maintain a comfortable working environment in areas of machine operation For safety reasons press the sleep button M when it will not be used for a long period of time such as overnight As an added safety measure turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord when the machine will not be used for an extended period of time such as during consecutive holidays Use a USB cable that is shorter than 3 meters 9 10 inch Paper that has just been output from the machine may be hot Be careful when removing or aligning paper from the output tray Touching paper right after it is output may result in low temperature burns Chapter 1 Preface 17 imagePRESS C800 Series Information in this operation guide Information in this operation guide Read this operation guide to learn what this product can do for you how to operate and maintain the print system and how to use it in a safe way The guide begins with basic information on the print system parts the concept
108. agata 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Yougatanaga 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Kakugata 2 240 mm x 332 mm 9 1 2 x 13 Custom size envelopes 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Paper size for stacking Location booklet tray Default sizes 305 mm x 457 mm A3 A4R 12 x 18 11 x 17 LTTR Paper size for stapling Location lower tray Default sizes A3 A4 A4R 11 x 17 LTR LTRR Paper size for punching Location lower tray upper tray External 2 3 Hole Puncher C1 Letter Executive 11 x 17 Paper weight Top tray 52 256 g m 14 Ib bond 95 Ib cover Lower and upper tray 52 300 g m 2 14 Ib bond 110 Ib cover Booklet tray 60 256 g m 16 Ib bond 95 Ib cover Chapter 9 References 283 imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Stacking capacity for stack Top tray ing A4 A5R LTR STMTR 250 sheets or 43 mm 1 69 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTTR 125 sheets or 21 mm 0 83 Upper tray with offset stacked A4 LTR 1 300 sheets or 188 mm 7 4 A3 A4R 11 x 17 LTRR 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g m 16 Ib bond 650 sheets or 96 mm 3 78 Upper tray without offset stacked A4 A5R LTR STMR 1 300 sheets or 188 mm 7 4 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7
109. age 289 Supported media sizes by paper input optional on page 291 Before you begin e Check and prepare the media See Check and prepare media before loading on page 130 Awake the print system from sleep mode if applicable See Use the energy save modes on page 192 Procedure 1 Grip the handle and pull out the paper tray un til it stops 2 Lift up the tab paper guide from its holder 1 and fix the tab paper guide with the blue screw 2 152 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load tab paper into the internal paper trays 3 Place the tab paper in reverse order in the pa per tray See Feed instruction for tab paper on page 263 IMPORTANT Make sure the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark 4 Squeeze the top of the front guide and slide the guides towards and against the tab paper 5 Gently close the paper tray until it clicks into place CAUTION When you close the paper tray be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal in jury 6 Return the tab paper guide back to its holder when the job is ready After you finish O IMPORTANT Make sure you put the tab paper guide into its holder to avoid a paper jam Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight or high temperatures Chapter 5 Print the jobs 153 imagePRESS C800 Series Stop pr
110. ake sure the loaded the media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark 5 Gently close the paper tray and make sure it clicks into place CAUTION When you close the paper tray be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal in jury After you finish When a paper jam occurs or you notice poor image quality turn over the media stack and reload the media stack Do not reload textured single sided coated or already printed paper to avoid a paper jam For these media take a new stack Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight or high temperatures 136 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the paper module Load media into the paper module Each of the three paper trays of the optional paper module can hold up to 2 000 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond The paper trays feed the media face up _ ie 0 8 U ie oy 78 Location of the paper module NOTE e When you change from plain paper to coated paper the print system fans the media first e Check that the height of the loaded media stack is maximum 20 mm 0 8 to avoid curled and creased edges O IMPORTANT e When you lift the inside lifter in the paper tray for example because you dropped something do not lift the lifter more than 50 mm 2 or diagonally This can cause a malfunctio
111. anagement in the queues on page 101 See Advanced color manage ment on page 27 imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 2 Explore the print system 35 Control panel Control panel The control panel is the central point used to operate the print system and to manage print jobs copy jobs and scan jobs The control panel provides you full system control The following table describes the main parts of the control panel and their functions ea Description control panel 1 Sleep button M to put the print system into the sleep mode or to wake the print sys tem from the sleep mode 2 Stop button to stop the printing process after a set or as soon as possible 3 Paper tray button js to access paper tray functions and overviews such as e An overview of the media and filling levels of the paper trays e Open a paper tray e Assign media to a paper tray or disable media Start a media registration for selected media 4 USB port to e Print from a USB drive e Scan to a USB drive e Attach the Eye One spectrophotometer 5 Schedule button to access the schedule 6 Jobs button to access e The copy and print job function The DocBox folders e The list of scheduled jobs e The list of waiting jobs The list of printed jobs The list of scanned documents 7 Trays button to access paper tray functions and overviews see the paper tray but ton 3 36 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePR
112. anel indicates if the staple cartridges need replacing You can find the saddle stitch unit in the stacker stapler 115 Location of the saddle stitch unit O IMPORTANT For information on the Canon genuine staple cartridges see Consumables on page 185 e Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine When you perform a maintenance task such as replace a staple cartridge remove waste or solve jams other machine parts can continue with job process activities Remove the printed output from the booklet tray before you replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit E NOTE We recommend ordering staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out When a staple cartridge is empty replace both cartridges e Only use staple cartridges intended for your print system 116 Staple Cartridge D2 Staple Cartridge D3 for Booklet Finisher T1 For more information see Check the filling level of the staple cartridge on page 128 Standard stacker stapler on page 45 System monitoring on page 120 Before you begin Remove printed output from the booklet tray Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 207 imagePRESS C800 Series Replace in the standard stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover of the stacker stapler 2 Pull out the saddle stitch unit until it stops 1 Pull out a
113. anner sheet ssssssssssssssssssssnrnnrrsserrrnnnrnnserrnnnnnnne 105 Binding edge COPY JOD iii cccstevelsegveceve kedinin iaeiei ndine 236 Print Setting iiniu 242 Binding originals GOPY JODS i icccesessisccsnzs sects sssacteines snes esscziiascnanatens 236 SCAM JODS iiccisssasesciscdencdvssaesachh cdeesdsessecticdinwiels 240 Booklet making OPTIONS eeeeceeeeessneeeeeeeesessseneeeeeeeeeeessseneeeeeeeeenegs 23 Booklet trimmer commercial NAMEC L ccccccceeesesstteeeeeeeeesssenaeees 33 lOCALION siz ievdin Shei aenean 33 SPECIFICATIONS iriserai iaa 285 Booklets COPY JODS ccccccssteeeeeeeesseeeteeeeeeeesssesnaeeeeeeeess 236 Print S tLING aii i es Wann 242 Bulk paper module supported ENVELOPES ccssccccceeessssssteeeeees 292 supported MECiIa ccccccccceeesssseeeeeeeeeees 289 291 Bulk paper module commercial NAMEC L cccsccccecesssestteeeeeeeeessssaeees 33 feed instruction of envelopes 261 loading media iNtO eeeeesesteeeeeeeeeees 141 142 DaMtS ii ecccee Ai certian aa anes 39 SPECIFICATIONS cccccccccecessseteeeeeeeeessssneeeeeeeeens 272 c Calibration COSCLIPTION cceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeessseneeeeeeeeeeeseenees 160 for maximum print Quality cece 165 perform media family calibration 0 163 perform printer Calibration cccscccceeeeees 162 FECOMMENATION cssceseeeeeeeeeesssssneeeeeeeeeens 161 Check first set imagePRESS C800 Series 305
114. ased workflow The task based workflow structures the tasks for the staff involved with the print system Print operator is in the central position of the workflow The control panel is the central information point for the print operator The print operator is responsible for the job planning and the print production but can also perform last minute job changes and color management from the control panel Media based workflow The media catalog is an integrated central catalog with predefined media that meet the print system specifications Two print modes There are two printing modes the document printing mode and the optional transaction printing mode via IPDS or PCL6 A system reboot is not necessary to switch between the printing modes Document printing workflow The document printing workflow describes the route from the job preparation to the finishing and delivery of the printed output The document printing workflow has three phases 1 Job preparation Prepress staff defines the print document and job settings and submits the print job to the PRISMAsync controller The prepress staff uses PRISMA software a printer driver automated workflows or hotfolders to prepare and submit the jobs Job planning Print jobs arrive in one of the following PRISMAsync job locations a DocBox the list of waiting jobs or the list of scheduled jobs The active workflow profile determines how toPRISMAsync route the jobs The print operator i
115. ates that the waste toner container has sufficient space An orange icon indicates that the waste toner container is almost full A red toner indicates that the waste toner container is full Touch a waste toner container indicator or go to the System view to see the filling level of the waste toner container 76 Waste toner container indicators For more information see Schedule on page 122 System monitoring on page 120 Replace the waste toner container on page 196 Procedure 1 Touch the indicator or go to System gt Printer 2 Check the filling level in the Supplies pane Chapter 5 Print the jobs 129 imagePRESS C800 Series Handle media Handle media Check and prepare media before loading Before you load media into the paper trays it is important to check and prepare the media When there are load and storage instructions on the paper package follow these instructions When you print on media that have absorbed moisture steam may be released from the output area of the machine This is due to the evaporation of moisture in the paper caused by the high temperature in the print module A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper Do not store media in places exposed to open flames This can cause the paper to ignite which could result in burns or a fire E NOTE Use paper recommended by Canon for high quality output Some commerciall
116. ation procedure For the shading correction you need the Eye One spectrophotometer Ca ibrate for maximum print quality on page 165 Media family calibration PRISMAsync provides as default the coated and uncoated media families A media family is a set of media with the same output profile one per halftone and calibration values Before you start a media family calibration always perform the printer calibration A media family calibration is necessary for the following situations After the installation of the print system for the default media families coated and uncoated When a new media family is created When a service replaces system parts 160 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series About calibration e When you want to increase the print quality for frequently used media families For the media family calibration you need the Eye One spectrophotometer Media for calibration The printer and media family calibration need media Media for the printer calibration You can define and see the media for the printer calibration in the Settings Editor NOTE To find the media for printer calibration in the Settings Editor Preferences gt Print job defaults gt Calibration media See System configuration on page 182 Normal media for standard and professional printer calibration e Oc Top Colour FSC 100 g m 27 Ib bond e Canon CS 814 81 4 g m 22 Ib bond e Mon
117. can file destinations and the removal of scan files in the Settings Editor See System configuration on page 182 Scan job definition PRISMAsync automatically defines a number of settings for the originals and the scan file However you can overrule these automatic settings The automatic settings have the prefix Auto Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs 57 imagePRESS C800 Series Scan jobs Original 1 or 2 sided Original type Job name TIFF printing 30 Auto Portrait left Enter file ID la TIFF Multi Page LZW Zoom a Fit to page Auto Top right 100 Margin erase Adjust image Color Black amp white 2 o ER ee 0 0 C amp B 0 0 Color 0 0 Color 0 0 sRGB 30 Scan job settings The following scan job information is available r 1 2 3 4 5 Original pane with settings for the originals Output pane with settings for the scan file Job pane with generic settings for the entire job Preview pane to show the results of the settings Action buttons to save settings in a template or to use subsets For more information see Scan job settings on page 240 Output settings values and icons on page 246 58 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan The automatic document fee
118. cartridges intended for your print system 110 Staple P1 for Saddle Finisher AM2 For more information see Check the filling level of the staple cartridge on page 128 Professional stacker stapler on page 43 System monitoring on page 120 Before you begin Remove printed output from the booklet tray Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 201 imagePRESS C800 Series Replace in the professional stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover of the stacker stapler 2 Pull out the saddle stitch unit 1 and hold the green tab of the staple case to pull out the sta ple case 2 3 Squeeze the light blue areas 1 to lift the sta ple case cover 2 4 Squeeze 1 to release and lift the empty staple cartridge 2 5 Insert the new staple cartridge until it clicks in to place 6 Place the staple case cover back in its original position 202 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Replace in the professional stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit 7 Return the staple case back into the saddle stitch unit and check that the two arrows are aligned 8 Repeat step 2 7 for the other staple cartridge 9 Gently push the saddle stitch unit back into the stacker stapler 1 as far as possible Close the front cover 2 A CAUTION e When you push the saddle stitch unit to its original position b
119. ces imagePRESS C800 Series Paper input specifications Features Power requirement Power consumption Dimensions WxDxH Weight Document Insertion Unit M1 Specification Description Capacity Paper size Paper weight Media Power requirement Power consumption Dimensions WxDxH Weight Value Automatic tray opening 120 127 V AC 60 Hz 2 2 A Maximum 480 W 717 mm x 686 mm x 568 mm 28 1 4 x 27 x 22 3 8 Approximately 70 kg 154 Ib Value Optional sheet and cover insertion unit 2 x 200 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib bond Default sizes 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR Custom sizes 182 mm x 182 mm 330 2 x 487 7 mm 7 2 x 7 2 13 x 19 2 52 300 g m 14 Ib bond 110 Ib cover For inserts thin paper 52 63 g m 14 Ib bond 16 Ib bond plain paper 64 105 g m 17 Ib bond 28 Ib bond recycled paper heavy paper 106 300 g m 29 Ib bond 110 Ib cover coated pa per 106 300 g m2 29 Ib bond 110 Ib cover colored paper tabs textured paper bond paper prepunched paper letterhead tracing paper Pass through mode all media as supported by the main engine 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 1 0A Maximum 120 W 746 mm x 793 mm x 1407 mm 29 3 8 x 31 1 4 x 55 3 8 Approximately 61 kg 134 Ib imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 9 References 273 Finishing and delivery specifications Fin
120. ces 237 Copy job settings Quality settings Property Job setting What you can define Margin erase Margin erase Margin erase for one or more page edges with a maximum of 100 mm 3 94 Use less margin to ignore punch holes in origi nals Adjust image Adjust image Adjustments in brightness contrast and color settings You see the results in a preview pane Color quality Color Black amp white Add an information bar e Copy in color or black amp white or choose automatic detection The Settings Editor has the settings used to compose the information bar Finishing settings Property Job setting What you can define Stapling Binding Staple method and saddle stitch settings Folding Folding Fold method of the copies Trimming Trimming Trim method according to trim size or paper size Punching Punching Number of holes or die set dependent punch pattern General job settings Property Job setting What you can define Job name Job name New name for the job Number of sets Number of sets e Number of sets maximum 65 000 e Check first set print only the first set of the job Print queue Destination Destination of the copy job list of waiting jobs scheduled jobs or a DocBox Separator sheets Separator sheets Use of special media to distinguish individual sets For more information see About copy jobs on page 55 Output settings values and icons on page 246 Zoom function on page 250 Fin
121. ch it This can cause personal injury Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 209 imagePRESS C800 Series Remove the staple waste 4 Push the staple waste tray back to its original position or as far as possible 5 Close the front cover of the stacker stapler CAUTION When you close the front cover of the stacker stapler be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury 210 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Remove in the professional stacker stapler the punch waste Remove in the professional stacker stapler the punch waste The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the punch waste tray is full The print system cannot punch when the punch waste tray is full This instruction only describes the removal of punch waste of the stacker stapler Refer to the user manual of the professional puncher how to remove punch waste from the professional puncher 118 Location of the punch waste tray O IMPORTANT Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine When you perform a maintenance task such as replace a staple cartridge remove waste or solve jams other machine parts can continue with job process activities For more information see Professional stacker stapler on page 43 System monitoring on page 120 Procedure 1 Open the front cover of the stacker stapler 2 Check that the guide
122. chedule predicts the total production and offers a daily up to eight hour plan board The schedule provides all information on the scheduled jobs so you are able to intervene when needed and keep your print system running The user interface of the schedule shows the following information e The availability of media for the scheduled jobs e The availability of the output trays of finishers and the high capacity stacker Prediction of the time the job is ready Prediction of the time the print system stops Not all information of the schedule is applicable for the transaction printing mode When the transaction printing mode is active the schedule only shows information on the status of the output and input locations and the supplies See 7ransaction printing on page 87 The information of the schedule in the document printing mode ae 9 123_vPr_cmvk _Iso0coated_1 1_F pdf O a O e 4 H Load Required media 5 minutes lg A4B 100 g m2 TopColor White 15 minutes a A3 100 g m2 TopColor White Required output locations l Stacker stapler upper tray 4 sacra Ss rr _ ES S Schedule Jobs Trays By System 71 The schedule for the document printing mode The information of the schedule in document printing mode e The timeline 1 shows the job and its estimated print time The vertical red white bar indicates when the p
123. cl erpereereeerceeee ener cerrerrirrpert cererereeeere tt error 35 list Of printed jODS ce eeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 100 Envelopes checking and preparing before loading 132 overview of supported types 22 requirement before loading 132 Error shading COLE CtION cccsceeeeeeeessssteeeeeeeeseee 233 F Feeding originals automatic document feeder 59 File ID SCAM ODS iatestacies eter ira sa eesti 241 File type SCAN JODS cccccseeeeeeeeeessssneeeeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeess 240 Finishing and delivery SPECIFICATIONS cccscceeceeeesssssteeeeeeeesssssnneeeees 274 Finishing OPTiONS eeeeceeesssteeeeeeeeeessseneeeeeeeeeessssenneeeeeeeeeees 23 Fixing belt refresh ProCeCure eeesscceeeeseeeeessteeteeeteeetees 224 Folder commercial NAMEC L ccccccccceesssetteeeeeeeeesssseanees 33 lOCATION Ls ececccceessesstsneeeeeeeesseeseneeeeeeesesssssneeeeenens 33 DAMS weep acsacsiviaveasaceass seasiccea sata savccasccasscadsidesiacascens 47 SPECIFICATIONS ccccccecceeeesssesteeeeeeeesssssnneeeees 275 Folding COPY JODS cccceseeeeceeeeesseseneeeeeeeesssesnaneeeeeeess 238 OPON Seesen E rere Tei 25 Print Setting iisi ae An Bank dees 244 Format SCAM JODSiic ccssscsecessesiecesasadeceisetensesaiesbhawsctanaeds 240 G Glass plate ClOA NING inca aia oda aaiae 216 feed instruction for half fold eeeceeseeees 257 feed instruction for parallel fold 258 feed instruction for punchi
124. collect wasted toner Left hand cover to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs or to access the waste toner container imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 8 Help 229 Problem Solving Problem Solving Problems occur due to a print system or a job handling problem Below you can find an overview of solutions for problems that can occur Prom soon Paper jam Follow the instructions on the control panel After you have solved a paper jam the print process resumes from the set where the jam occurred Check for double prints Machine error Follow the instructions on the control panel The control panel informs you if a restart of the print system is necessary Service required Follow the instructions on the control panel The control panel informs you if you need to contact the local service representative Unit reconditioning Follow the instructions on the control panel When you have solved the problem the print process resumes from the set where the problem occurred The control panel may ask to remove sheets Print system cannot deter Follow the instructions on the control panel and check the output mine if the output is com The print system asks you to confirm that the printed output is plete complete Printed output or originals Perform a procedure to clean machine parts have streaks or spots Cleaning tasks and procedures on page 214 See For some procedures you need a maintenance for operators PIN
125. continue with job process activities For more information see Standard stacker stapler on page 45 System monitoring on page 120 Procedure 1 Open the front cover of the punch unit 1 and pull out the punch waste tray 2 2 Discard the punch waste W IMPORTANT Make sure that the punch waste tray is completely emptied 3 Return the punch waste tray back to its original position 1 and close the front cover of the punch unit 2 CAUTION When you close the front cover of the punch unit be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 213 imagePRESS C800 Series Keep the print system clean Keep the print system clean Cleaning tasks and procedures To keep your print system in optimal condition and prevent poor image quality clean the following machine parts regularly e Glass plate e Scanning area of the automatic document feeder e Control panel e Corona assembly wires via the control panel e Automatic document feeder rollers via the control panel e Main unit roller via the control panel e Fixing roller via the control panel e Drums via the control panel You are advised to clean the control panel weekly and the other parts monthly The control panel enables access to the wires rollers and drums To begin the procedures to clean machine parts you need a maintenance for operators password See System configuration
126. der 59 Special feeder starting at glass Plate cssssssseseesesseeeeeees 61 supported ENVELOPES eerseeereeereneeerenrereens 292 Subse aan e A A 68 supported MEIA ssesersssserssereresntersenees 289 291 template Sinaia 57 Special feeder Scan job commercial NAMe sssssssssssissssrrssrirrssrrrnnerens 33 SOTLIN GS e RARE 240 feed instruction of envelopes 262 Scanning sensors loading Media iNto ceceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 145 Cleaning procedure 219 locatio 2x ies ean as Guatinnaa iene 33 Scanning DONS icecice eens cessctsecsscteacasssenacesccssasasesanenaesstestaiis 42 VCS sachcecadcossassccicetiaerdi vidas ttiedaeiateeeens 35 SPECIFICATIONS seers teeesseteerssiteeeeniteeeenttee 270 Scheduled jobs SPROUL OOF change print order Of scccssssssssessssesessesesseeeesees 100 COSCIIPTION cecceceeeteeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeenaeeeeeenenenens 266 media assignment via schedule 125 Spot Colors moving to the list of waiting jobs E A 111 color mapping PAE EATE E E E 27 Order Of printiNng eeessieerisrsrrrririsrerererrsrsres 100 Spot layers Advanced color management 27 311 imagePRESS C800 Series Index Stacker stapler T FEMOVING OUTPUE eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeneees 155 ae i Task splittin Stacker stapler with saddle stitch unit patung specifications 278 color MANAGEMEN1 cceeseessteeeeeeeeesessteeeeeeeees 26 PaE a ene nT Media configuration ssessseesreserserreerrerenerene 30 S
127. der feeds and scans a set of originals for copy or scan jobs It automatically transfers the originals to the scan area O IMPORTANT e Thin originals can become creased in high temperatures or high humidities When you scan long originals 432 mm 630 mm 17 24 8 push back the auxiliary originals tray and feed the originals by hand to prevent creased originals Do not place the following originals into the automatic document feeder that are difficult to feed such as Originals with tears or large binding holes Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds Clipped or stapled originals Carbon backed paper Transparencies and other highly transparent media e Always smooth out folds in originals before you place them into the automatic document feeder Do not drop clips or other objects into the gap of the originals tray Do not add or remove originals during the scan process Do not place objects in the original output area This can cause damage to originals e Do not scan originals more than 30 times This can cause the originals to become folded and creased When the rollers of the automatic document feeder get dirty due to originals written with pencil perform the automatic document feeder cleaning procedure See C ean the automatic document feeder rollers on page 220 1 Adjust the paper guides to fit the size of your originals You can place a set of mixed size originals into the automatic d
128. di Neusiedler 100 g m2 27 Ib bond International Paper Hammermill Color Copy Digital 105 g m 28 Ib bond Heavy media for professional printer calibration e Oc Top Colour FSC 250 g m 92 Ib cover e Mondi 250 g m 92 Ib cover e Mohawk Navajo Cover 98 bright 243 g m 90 Ib cover Extra heavy media for professional printer calibration e Oc Top Colour FSC 300 g m 110 Ib cover e Mondi 300 g m 110 Ib cover e International Paper Hammermill Color Copy Digital 271 g m 100 Ib cover Media for the media family calibration Make sure you use the same calibration media to represent the media family each time you perform a media family calibration Daily calibration scenarios O You cannot measure the print quality of the output on an absolute scale because print quality depends on the expectations you had beforehand You need to remain aware of the correlation between calibration procedures and print quality IMPORTANT You are strongly advised to perform a daily printer calibration There are three calibration scenarios each creating better print quality Choose the scenario that best fits your print quality demands e Configure the standard printer calibration mode in the Settings Editor and perform a printer calibration daily e Configure the professional printer calibration mode in the Settings Editor and perform a printer calibration daily e Configure the professional printer calibration mode i
129. double tap the job to open the Properties window Make the required settings Use the optional Page programming function if required Check the results of the changed settings in the preview pane Press OK 92 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Combine DocBox jobs Combine DocBox jobs You can combine DocBox jobs into one new job You can change the settings for the combined job in a single property window The settings available depend on the individual job settings The icon indicates a combined job Use the list button to toggle between the list and the thumbnail view Build To DocBox 47 User Operator Pages 2 Label Copy job Job order Submitted Apr 17 2014 2 37 46 PM Apr 17 2014 2 29 54 PM 44 Job combination in DocBox For more information see DocBox on page 91 Change a DocBox job on page 92 Procedure 1 Touch Jobs gt DocBox 2 Select the DocBox folder that contains the jobs you want to combine 3 Enter a PIN if requested 4 Select the jobs you want to combine or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple jobs together 5 Select Build from the drop down menu The Create build window appears 6 Use the Up and Down buttons to change the job sequence in the combined job if required 7 Touch OK E NOTE Split the combined job into the original jobs with the
130. e Compression sharpness and raster ad Preferences gt System settings KO justments Frequency of refreshment of the fixing Preferences gt System adjustments KO roller Color cast correction for each of the print Preferences gt System adjustments KO colors A color cast is a tint of a particular color usually unwanted which affects white backgrounds Correction of color fading graininess at Preferences gt System adjustments KO the tail end of printed sheets Correction of white gaps between two Preferences gt System adjustments KO areas of the printed color images Correction of uneven gloss caused by in Preferences gt System adjustments KO creased temperature of the fixing unit Print job production Settings and information Location Role Productivity improvement for combined Preferences gt System settings KO 1 sided and 2 sided jobs Print speed adjustments for low tempera Preferences gt System adjustments gt KO ture environments Print quality adjustments Adjustment of the print speed of the first sheets of a job Transaction printing Settings and information Location Settings to enable the transaction printing Transaction printing gt Settings KO mode and to define the port Creation of transaction printing setups Transaction printing gt Setups KO A transaction printing setup is a collection of preset settings for streaming jobs Chapt
131. e careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury When you close the front cover of the stacker stapler be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 203 imagePRESS C800 Series Replace in the standard stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit Replace in the standard stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the staple cartridge needs replacing You can find the staple unit in the stacker stapler 111 Location of the staple unit IMPORTANT For information on the Canon genuine staple cartridges see Consumables on page 185 Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine When you perform a maintenance task such as replace a staple cartridge remove waste or solve jams other machine parts can continue with job process activities Remove the seal that holds the staples together after you place the staple cartridge into the staple case NOTE We recommend ordering staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out e Only use staple cartridges intended for your print system 112 Staple J1 for Staple Finisher T1 and Booklet Finisher T1 For more information see Check the filling level of the staple cartridge on
132. e media on page 130 Procedure 1 Press Schedule 2 Select the media you want to load in the Required media pane 2 Chapter 5 Print the jobs 125 imagePRESS C800 Series Load media for the scheduled jobs Touch Load 3 Select a paper tray to load the media Open the paper tray and load the media into the paper tray Close the paper tray Touch OK to confirm PRISMAsync automatically assigns the media to the correct paper tray SO ONE a 126 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Check the filling level of the toner cartridge Check the filling level of the toner cartridge The dashboard at the top of the control panel and the operation attention light warns you when a toner cartridge needs replacing The color of the icon indicates the status of a toner cartridge A blue toner icon indicates that a toner cartridge contains sufficient toner An orange toner icon indicates that a toner cartridge is less than 25 full e A red toner icon indicates that a toner cartridge is empty Touch a toner cartridge indicator or go to the System view to see the filling levels of the toner cartridges 74 Toner cartridge indicators For more information see Schedule on page 122 System monitoring on page 120 Replace a toner cartridge on page 193 Procedure 1 Touch the indicator or go to System gt Printer 2 Check the filling levels in the Supplies pane Chapter 5
133. e You can use the print system in two modes document printing and transaction printing This operation guide helps you to meet business demands when you prepare plan and print your jobs with the print system 20 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series What output can you create What output can you create Media for your output Media catalog for media selection PRISMAsync controls the media definition centrally with the media catalogue The controller s media based workflow PRISMAsync results in less mistakes PR S MAsync operating concept on page 28 See When you prepare a job you can select media from the media catalog The media catalog stores attributes for all media that are key to the print quality such as size weight media type color media family and surface See Settings Editor media attributes on page 294 A media family is a group of media that has the same specifications and uses the same color output profile See Co or reproduction for your output on page 26 After the job submission use the schedule to see which media the job requires and when to assign these media to paper trays Temporary media During the job preparation you can also temporarily specify media for a job Temporary media are not part of the media catalog When the job is printed on temporary media you can find these temporary media in the media section of the System view on the control panel When you want to
134. e document printing mode is active you can submit jobs to several locations on the PRISMAsync controller The active workflow profile also determines the destination The following locations are available on PRISMAsync e List of waiting jobs e List of scheduled jobs e DocBox optional When the print system is in the transaction printing mode PRISMAsync routes the streaming jobs directly to the list of scheduled jobs Waiting jobs When jobs arrive in the list of waiting jobs you determine the print order of the jobs You are also able to change print job settings or perform page programming Using one of the selection functions you can select the jobs and then give the print command The jobs are added to the list of scheduled jobs To increase the print productivity you can use the job bundle function to combine several jobs into a single job The original jobs are no longer visible but you can recover the original jobs with the split function You can change some properties and the print order of the individual jobs in the bundled job Ready Properties Waiting jobs 5 jobs 1 selected Jot P S Sub ed Duratior ed media p 4 a Preisliste Vespa Classic_2009_PP pdf a 5 Oct 13 201 0 20 4B 100g m2 Remote operator 1 40 26 PM TopColor White i 4 E SEW_Solar Trackingsysteme_EN_Drupa_PP pdf A Oct 13 201 a B A4D 100 g m Remote operator 1 40 38 PM TopColor White D 4 M Q Ea
135. e ee eee 29 Print settings PAGE PFOGrFAMMING ssssstececeeeesssssntteeeeeeeees 244 PDEF VT jOD eccceeesceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeenaeees A transaction printing Mode 88 Print system Enabling sleep MOde ccscceeeeeceeeeeeseeeees 192 POSTON naumanni anin 191 SPECIFICATIONS ccccccccceessssstteeeeeeeessssseneeeeeeees 268 switching to transaction printing mode 90 transaction printing MOdEC e eeeeeeeeees 88 turning Offic x 02 hoes oh ee aaciel ei ven avec 190 CUMMING OMe secs zeccccestec ces naonana anina 189 Print ticket ChE atl OM E hirer ei 50 Printed job loading media tO ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneetees 125 Printed jobs E SHreddinG seceveeseseyee sternia aoea 100 enable Printing cccceeessceeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeneees 100 PNUD Gica as peer 100 112 removal Of ececeeeesesteeeeeeeesssssneeeeeeeeeessssnneeeeees 100 TOM OVI G isisisi sadectesscecesesiaes Ces szces cea seideve tse 114 Printer cover commercial NAMEC eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 33 Printer driver dOWNIOA Qisir niinniin tinaaa 50 JOD preparation sssssssssssssresssrnssssrnrsrrrnsereneses 50 Printing DocBoxjobS s ccskein ied 95 printed JODS ee eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 112 scheduled jODS cceececeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeees 110 Waiting jObS sssessssssssesesssisssrnnnssnnnsrrnnnenns 99 109 PRISMAprepare descriptiON isinira isiien apinain 52 JO
136. e registration procedure Register the color tones for the ACCT function on page 172 See E NOTE Only activate the ACCT function when you have noticed slight color deviations in the color tones during some time When the color tones deviate again you can repeat this procedure Before you begin Make sure the print system is calibrated and in optimal condition Procedure Touch System gt Color adjustment Touch Auto Correct Color Tone gt Perform correction Select the slot with the values of the previously registered color tones Touch OK Select the media Touch OK Follow the instructions on the control panel NOod PON gt After you finish When the ACCT function is no longer required for example when parts are replaced you can deactivate the ACCT function again with the Reset button Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high 173 imagePRESS C800 Series Create a trapping preset Create a trapping preset When you notice white edges between color planes use a trapping preset to correct the connection between the color planes A trapping preset is a collection of trapping settings for a job or job subset Use the trapping preset editor to create your own trapping presets ca Eoo al Preset ig Trap width My trapping preset Default width pt Standard Black width pt s i End style Trap thresholds Small text scaling Step Images Trap
137. e scheduled jobs The schedule displays the required media for the scheduled jobs You can load and assign media for jobs that are ready for printing via the Trays button on the right hand side of the control panel or via the schedule When you load media via the schedule PRISMAsync automatically assigns the media to the correct paper tray The print system can retrieve media from any paper tray that contains the required media You can open a paper tray when the print system is busy The paper tray opens as soon as possible When the print system uses the paper tray for a job and the media are also available in another paper tray the print process continues When there are no other paper trays with the media the print process stops EY 123_VPR_CMYK_ISOcoated_1 1_F_x3 pdf Q crate 35 h 5 minutes F A4B 100 g m2 TopColor White 15 minutes EF A3 100 g m2 TopColor White EEEE 1hour 2hours 4 hours 8 hours Required output locations i Stacker stapler upper tray 4 Sincer stack trav EErEE J Stacker stapler lower tray Schedule Jobs Trays By System 73 The required media for the scheduled jobs For more information see Media for your output on page 21 Handle media on page 130 Schedule on page 122 System monitoring on page 120 Before you begin O IMPORTANT Make sure you know how to load the different media types into the paper trays See Handl
138. e subsets Restore finishing set Split finishing Use the finishing properties of original subsets tings for subsets General job settings Property Job setting What you can define Job name Job name New name for the job Number of sets Number of sets e Number of sets maximum 65 000 e Check first set print only the first set of the job 244 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Print job settings Property Job setting What you can define Print range Print range Range of pages in a job Separator sheets Separator sheets Use of special media to distinguish individual sets For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 Orientation on your output on page 21 Use page programming on page 107 Chapter 9 References 245 imagePRESS C800 Series Output settings values and icons Output settings values and icons The available settings depend on the print system configuration the installed licenses and software and the attached optionals The control panel shows icons to represent a job setting or a group of job settings 1 or 2 sided 1 sided 2 sided Binding edge E ve Portrait left Portrait top Landscape left Landscape top Media Media E Print sides Cover Layout Same up Multiple up Fit to page Percent J Top right Top left Top center 246 Chapter 9 Refer
139. edededeeedenedenedeastecsveuess 90 akak seveennnggcneunususssuuananansnnsnsennnnnngggggegenenesvoe GelOF MaNSGETABNE n aen 6088 replacing the staple cartridges in the saddle stitch unit 207 CONFIQUIATION ccccecceecesssetteeeeeeeeesssseteeeeeeeeeees 88 Sn eee eye ertraes convergence PFiNtiNG scsceccseseeseecesssseeeeeeees 87 Staple Cartridge oe oe deseriptiO Mission eieaa 87 checking filling level 128 imade adiustment 89 ordering for saddle stitch unit 00008 187 mmaa e eee JOD MANAGEMENL cccceeeeestteeeeeeesssseteeeeeeeeees 99 ordering for staple UNit ceeeseeeeetees 187 Staple waste Secure error FECOVETY teeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 89 SPS aS Transaction printing POMOVING iis is cecvsscvcccviedscecvcsdecesvescaeerdeestessdeeexereis 209 eens 35 stapling iobs 238 Transparencies pe a E E E E EE E x dhecking and preparing batons loadings 134 op o Peeteteetetteeetteteeteesteeerenneeeenneee entenent Tr pping for POF PHING S QUIN Gicciscczecescceestesces ates ecee ste leceeadesedee ste 244 license 35 Staus normalo Pike see sues evbuavt E E E description ssssssssssssssirssssrnssssinnsrinnnsrnnnnsnnnnnna 120 Pp J P Status LED CLEAtTION Of cceeeeeestteeeeeeesssseeneeeeeeeessssseneeeeeees 174 cana PriNt SOTING ss cies sis ieee ee er ee 243 IOC ATION isio Siaceiscdeceven Sodseeecsdecee te dianian iiaii 36 Tray mapping aap punter transaction printing MOdE cccccceeesseseteeees 87
140. edi EastWest_kalender_select pdf Oct 13 2014 iz Q Schedule Jobs Trays B System 50 List of scheduled jobs Printed jobs When a job is ready it is visible in the list of printed jobs You must move the printed job to the list of waiting jobs before you can reprint the job Printed jobs remain available after the print system is shut down Proof prints or stopped jobs are not visible in the list of printed jobs In the following situations you are not able to reprint jobs The list of printed jobs is disabled in the Settings Editor e The print system is in the transaction printing mode e PRISMAsync already removed the print jobs from the list Removal of printed jobs When you no longer need your printed jobs you can remove them from the list of printed jobs PRISMAsync can also remove printed jobs automatically Automatic removal of a printed job occurs after a preset period has expired For security reasons configure the optional E shredding function in the Settings Editor E shredding overwrites the deleted job data and prevents data recovery from a removed job When the automatic job removal is not active it is important to prevent a full system disc Delete print jobs manually from the list of printed jobs and the DocBox folders on a regular base 100 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Job management in the queues Selection of a series of jobs There are some useful selection functi
141. eeeaaaeeeeaaaeeeeeeaaeesesaaesensaseseseaeeeeneaaes 268 Paper input SPeCiFICATIONS ceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeen eee eeneaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaeeeenaaeesenaaeeesesaeeeeeeeaeeeeneaae 270 Finishing and delivery Specifications c cceeesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeseneaaeeeeneaaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaae 274 Remote Monitor specifications siirsin eenaa eaa aa a aa a aa a aaae Na a a ENE 288 Media specifications tinissi keds hia Ridin a E E O cence ae eee 289 Supported media types for paper input OPtiONAlS cccccccccesssssstseeeeeeessssssseeeeeeeessssseeeeeeeeesssssaeees 289 Supported media sizes by paper input OPtiOnNal ccccceeessceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeseneeaeeees 291 Supported envelope types by paper input OPtiONAl ccccccccssessseeeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeesseseenaeeeeeeesssssnaaeees 292 CUEING SE ICO Mcsesecessccsanexssasccscrscauestesac cat cesseasnsuesenee EE T A E 293 Settings Editor Specifications cccccccceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeesaaeeessaaeeeeesaaeeeeeseaaesenenaeeseneaaes 293 Settings Editor Media attriDUtes cccccccccccesssssseeeeeeeeesseseneeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeseessseeneeeeeeeessessaees 294 Settings Editor settings and information ccccccccccccessssstseeeeeeeessseeeeneeeeeeesssseseeeeeeeessssseeeeeeeeessssennaees 295 URN ee cee cece nests se E E E ANT 305 imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 1 Pr
142. een of the control panel becomes dirty you can simply clean the panel with water or a mild cleaning agent 120 Location of the control panel WARNING e When you clean the machine first turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord Failure to observe these steps can result in a fire or electrical shock Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly and clean the area around the base of the power plug s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp dusty or smoky location dust can build up around the power plug and become damp This can cause a short circuit and may result in a fire O IMPORTANT Do not dampen the cloth with too much water This can damage prints or machine parts Do not use alcohol benzene paint thinner or other solvents to clean machine parts This can damage plastic machine parts Procedure 1 Moisten the cloth with water or a mild cleaning agent and wring the cloth out thorough ly 2 Clean the display of the control panel 3 Wipe dry with a soft dry cloth Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 215 imagePRESS C800 Series Clean the glass plate area Clean the glass plate area Clean the automatic document feeder and the glass plate in order that the scanner can scan the originals correctly and can detect the size of the
143. eenn 70 Automatic color mismatch CONE LiNo p MESE A A E A EAA 171 Automatic color tone correction Correcto M sessioonis oosina AAS 173 Registrati Muoniossa cinawn 172 Automatic document feeder rollers cleaning procedure ssssssssssssissssrrrserrresesrnes 220 Automatic document feeder Cleaning EE 217 commercial MAMMEC cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseneeeees 33 feed instruction for half fold ceeeeseseeees 257 feed instruction for parallel fold 258 feed instruction for punching 256 feed instruction for stapling 251 feed instruction for tri fold in 258 feed instruction for tri fold OUt ccccceeee 258 feed instruction for Z fOId cccccceesssssnteeees 257 LOCATION 22s cei tees cnsse che taen aan anwaddn 32 DUNS coe cst ce woes tcc A sees dais 41 USAGE Ofeina adnia eeiees 59 ZOOM FUNCTION 000000ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 250 Auxiliary booklet tray location professional stacker stapler 43 location standard stacker stapler 45 Auxiliary originals receiving tray VOCATION ee 5 e52 E 41 Auxiliary originals tray ever tle 1 Perens eerrererereccere reer EA 41 sage Of sical Meine innit 59 Auxiliary tray UL DUT TRAY srest a hceccct ieee ee cecte eee 48 special FECCES cccccccceccesssssteeeeeeeesssssneeeeeeees 42 B Background originals COPY JODS crinii iaaiaee aiaiai 236 scan JODS ciii iini ntina anioi ianei a 240 B
144. eface Disclaimers Disclaimers The information in this document is subject to change without notice CANON INC MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON INFRINGEMENT CANON INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL To view the manual in PDF format Adobe Reader Adobe Acrobat Reader is required If Adobe Reader Adobe Acrobat Reader is not installed on your system please download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated website 8 Chapter 1 Preface imagePRESS C800 Series Trademarks Trademarks Oc Oc PRISMA Oc PRISMAsync Oc PRISMAprepare and Oc PRISMAaccess are registered trademarks of Oc PANTONE Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE identified standards Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color PANTONE and other Pantone Inc trademarks are the property of Pantone Inc Pantone Inc 2007 Pantone Inc is the copyright owner of color data and or software which are licensed to insert name of your company to distribute for use only in combination with insert appropriate name of Licensed Materials PAN
145. el The number of sets window shows the check first set check box 63 Check first set setting Make a proof print You can make a proof print of jobs that are ready for the print process in the list of waiting jobs and in the DocBox The proof print does not affect the number of sets that the print system prints for the job The proof print is an additional set 116 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Proof and test prints Intermediate check prints An intermediate check print is an automatic print sample of a job sheet The intermediate check print arrives in the output tray that is close to the print module Enable the intermediate check print setting in the System view of the control panel In the Settings Editor you can define the number of sheets between two sample sheets See System configuration on page 182 F E A A Receive gj Print g3 Output Print jobs to Scheduled jobs Next tray after each job Workflow profile Standard Re Intermediate check print p Language English US a E Warning time 10 minutes Local key operator settings amp Job name truncation Operator panel settings B Shut down system Q Schedule Jobs Trays By System 64 Intermediate check print setting Job ticket print You can check job settings with a job ticket print This print contains the
146. ences imagePRESS C800 Series Output settings values and icons bi 4 lel Center left Center Center right k Bottom left Bottom center Bottom right Shift Oon 0 gt lt lt gt lt a x Margin shift Image shift Print delivery gt Output location co Li Perfect Binder tray Stacker top tray Stacker stack tray Folder main tray Stacker stapler upper Stacker stapler lower Stacker stapler booklet tray tray tray Print delivery gt Sort Br 123 By page By set Print delivery gt Offset stacking az z E Each set Off Print delivery gt Advanced settings gt Sheet order 123 E yl 2A 2 2A Face up Face up reverse Face down Face down reverse Print delivery gt Advanced settings gt Sheet orientation a Header up LEF Header up SEF Header down LEF Header down SEF Chapter 9 References 247 imagePRESS C800 Series Output settings values and icons Margin erase Binding edge Adjust image Print jobs Basic model Density Brightness Advanced mode Color clipping CMYK curves Copy and scan jobs Color Brightness Contrast Describe original Describe result Color Black amp white Print jobs 0 O Black and white O0 Color bar Information bar Color Copy and
147. er 9 References 299 imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor settings and information Settings and information Attributes for the transaction printing set ups IPDS PCL output location behavior data resolution offset stacking font capture extending logical page size output recovery face orientation Image shift for preprinted media IPDS PCL Default input profiles halftone rendering intent color black amp white printing IPDS PCL Black preservation ignoring toner trans fer curves and embedded output profiles IPDS PCL Black color handling for PDF rip to 100 black or 100 of every color Caching and overprint simulation of PDF Logical tray mapping for paper trays IPDS PCL Default media for paper trays IPDS PCL Color names and numbers for each color station CMYK Resources and defaults fonts PDF fonts code pages color map ping tables Finishing Preferences gt Finisher adjustments Adjustments for new finishers Error recovery behavior for external fin ishers Feed direction of A4 LTR output in finish ers Face and header orientation in the output trays of finishers Delivery order of the output sheets Distance between staples when output has two staples Transaction printing gt IPDS setup Transaction printing gt PCL setup Transaction printing gt IPDS setup Transaction printing gt PCL setup Transaction pri
148. er Deck A1 Capacity Paper sizes Paper weight Paper feed technology Features 3 x 550 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond Default sizes 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R A5R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR Custom sizes including envelopes 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Envelopes ISO C5 162 mm x 229 mm 6 3 8 x 9 No 10 COM 104 7 mm x 241 3 mm 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Monarch 98 4 mm x 190 5 mm 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 DL 110 mm x 220 mm 4 1 3 x 8 2 3 Nagagata 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Yougatanaga 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Kakugata 2 240 mm 332 mm 9 1 2 x 13 60 325 g m2 16 Ib bond 120 Ib cover e Suction feed e Air separation e Paper level detection visual e Automatic tray opening e Double sheet detection imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 9 References 271 Paper input specifications Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 Specification Value Description Optional 3 tray paper input module Paper trays 3 x 2 000 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond Maximum paper capacity 6 000 sheets Paper sizes Default sizes 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R A5R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR Custom sizes including envelopes 139 7 mm x 182 mm 330 2mm x 487 7 mm 5 1 2 x 7 2 13 x 19 2 Envelopes ISO C5 162 mm x 229 mm 6 3 8 x 9 No 10 COM 104
149. erences 241 Print job settings Print job settings The following tables show the print job properties you can change on the control panel Apr 17 2014 3 35 13 PM 0 13 input Default Separator sheets Crystals_A3 ps Off Print range All Binding edge E Portrait left Zoom Q 100 m a Center Ko Front 0 0 0 Back 0 0 0 Margin erase ER 0 0 Stacker stapler upp 0 Adjust image Default Color Black amp white Binding Folding ad Bx Method None Folding None Trimming B None Punching None Layout settings Property Printing Binding edge Media Covers Booklet multiple pa ges per sheet Zoom images Job setting 1 or 2 sided Binding edge Media Cover Layout Zoom D What you can define Print on one or two sides of the sheet Binding position along the long or short side The binding edge automatically adjusts the margin shift direction the orientation and sta ple position Selection of media for the job Front and back cover Print on the cover or not Media for the cover Booklet printing Same up printing with variable number of images Multiple up printing with variable number of images Automatic zoom according to print size Manual zoom from 25 400
150. esees 292 Advanced color management s s sssseeeses 00e 27 Supported Media csceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 289 291 Licenses transaction printing MOdEC ceeseeeeeees 87 J Low power mode Job management print SYSCOIN 02 cece eeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeeeeaaes 192 automated WOrkflOW ccceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 70 bundling JOD Siccsericedacekiccestncseccacesssstsinsscoctiatouss 103 M changing job settings in queue 106 Main unit rollers DOCBOXii Assit dendanhnenkannn iia 91 Cleaning procedure 223 in the print QUCUES eeetceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaees 99 Manual planning workflow profile other priNter ssssssssrsrrrsrrnrrrnnrrnnenrrnnnnnrrnnnn etat 113 AAS CV UBIO TAS sistsshaiinininlsdeesssassiszsisndudndvetaseusventabees 77 page programming in QqUeUE eeeees 107 Margin erase FEMOVING JODS cceeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseees 114 COPY jODS cecccsseeeccesseeescesssessesseseesesseeeesesees 238 241 transaction printing MOdE ee 87 99 print Setting nxn nin edin die Gases 243 viewing jobs iN QUCUEC eeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 102 Media assignment workflow PFOfileS ceeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 73 transaction printing MOde sssssssessssseeeesseeees 87 Job name Media catalog COPY JODSiivssirssss rius inrssnssis rinaire a 238 244 adding temporary media tO sssssssseesssseeeeeees 96 SCAN JODS iio noaa da EGEE 241 curled media correctio cececececoccececococcecececoeceee 17
151. esult in burns or a fire Do not store toner cartridges in places that are exposed to open flames This can cause toner ignition which may result in burns or a fire If toner gets onto your hands or clothing immediately wash it off with cold water Warm water will set the toner If this happens it will become impossible to remove the toner stains A CAUTION Keep toner out of the reach of small children If toner is ingested consult a physician immediately O IMPORTANT e For information about Canon genuine toner see Consumables on page 185 e Be careful with counterfeit toners Be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners in the marketplace Use of counterfeit toner can result in poor print quality or machine performance Canon is not responsible for any malfunction accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner For more information see http www canon com counterfeit Do not replace toner cartridges until a message appears informing you that you must replace a toner cartridge e You can replace a toner cartridge while the print system is busy e The color of the toner cartridge that needs to be replaced is displayed on the control panel If multiple toner cartridges need to be replaced replace the toner cartridges in the following order black yellow magenta cyan e Wait to replace color toner cartridges when you want to continue copying or printing in black amp white Replace the color cartridge
152. etermine the route of jobs when they arrive on PRISMAsync You select one of the default workflow profiles You also can adjust the workflow profile attributes You can only create one custom workflow profile You can find the attributes of the active workflow at the top of the Workflow window GG Print Dz Output Destination of print job Scheduled jobs N Confirm start of job RI s Next output tray Alter each job N Destination of DocBox job Scheduled jobs a Check first set R Asin job ics Offset stacking Z sets asin job N 35 The workflow profile attributes For more information see Workflow profiles on page 73 Job management in the queues on page 99 Procedure 1 Touch System gt Setup gt Workflow profile 2 Select a workflow profile 3 Adjust the workflow profile if required The name of the workflow profile changes into Custom 4 Press OK u imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 79 Select an accounting mode Select an accounting mode The accounting feature on PRISMAsync stores and handles job and user information in account log files You can customize the definition of account log files to process the logging data into your cost charts or invoices You must define account IDs to charge job costs to departments or customers and enable the user identification in the Set
153. eues Touch to expand the list of Waiting jobs if required Select the jobs you want to print or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple jobs together Touch Print or Proof imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 109 Print a scheduled job immediately Print a scheduled job immediately You can give a scheduled print job priority over the other print jobs The Print now button allows you to print a job immediately The print system stops the active print job amp after a set is finished To print a scheduled job as soon as possible but not immediately use the To top function The job goes to the first position of the list of scheduled jobs Printing A3_002p pdf Apr 18 2014 8 07 14 AM 0 26 A3 100 g m TopColor White oer aii 0 01 Lg AaB 80 g m 8 07 16 AM TopColor White 8 09 11 AM Lote 0 01 Lg AD 100 g m2 TopColor White schedule Jobs Trays system 59 A scheduled job For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 View the jobs in the queues on page 102 Procedure 1 Touch Jobs gt Queues 2 Touch to expand the list of Scheduled jobs if required 3 Select the job that you want to print immediately 4 Touch Print now or To top 110 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Move a scheduled job to the list of waiting jobs
154. eve maximum productivity The status bar on the dashboard the status LED on the control panel and the operator attention light all illuminate the same color This color indicates if you must perform an action See System monitoring on page 120 The different schedule parts use the following colors to let you know what the status of the input and output locations is Color Description Green Green to indicate that you do not need to perform an action Orange Orange to indicate that you must perform an action soon E Red Red to indicate that you must perform an action immediately i Gray Gray to indicate that the print system cannot estimate the time and the pages per job for example for jobs in the transaction printing mode Chapter 5 Print the jobs 123 imagePRESS C800 Series Schedule F A vertical red white bar in the time line indicates when the print system stops A vertical red white bar in the output location bar indicates when a stack eject of the high capacity stacker occurs Keep informed The control panel can display only one message at a time When there are more messages the control panel displays the first required or most important message To see all messages select the first message For more information see System monitoring on page 120 Status indicators on page 264 124 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load media for the scheduled jobs Load media for th
155. f select the required media from the media catalog pza SS 6 Media based workflow During the initial configuration of the print system the media catalog is filled with media and media attributes Media belong to a media family which ensures optimal color output settings See Co or reproduction for your output on page 26 and Settings Editor media attributes on page 294 When you work with the media catalog you can take advantage of the following benefits 30 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series PRISMAsync operating concept e The media in the media catalog store print quality attributes that the entire print system uses Each time you select the media from the media catalog the print system automatically applies the same media quality settings e The control panel the printer driver and the PRISMA software access the same media catalog e You can use the media catalog for copy jobs Define the media attributes with the Settings Editor See System configuration on page 182 Chapter 2 Explore the print system 31 imagePRESS C800 Series Main hardware parts Main hardware parts The print system can be given different configurations to match various print environments Your print system has basic hardware parts extended with optionals In the table below you can find descriptions of the main parts
156. g Transaction printing Transaction printing mode When there is a license for transaction printing IPDS or PCL you can operate the print system in the transaction printing mode An IPDS or PCL host sends a streaming job to a dedicated port in the print system The transaction printing mode fits print environments with large numbers of business critical data such as invoices checks and salary slips Typically in the transaction print mode that first non variable parts of a print job are stored on the controller and are then merged with the variable parts of the print job Applications to m 1 F Job preparation u prepare and submit I I job stream Scheduled jobs Print production H Finishing and delivery Pe Printing E Media loading 40 Job workflow for transaction printing mode During daily work you can switch between the transaction printing and document printing modes without rebooting the print system When the transaction printing mode is active the print system still accepts PDF and PostScript jobs However PRISMAsync starts to process these jobs when you switch off the transaction printing mode PDF containers in the data streams The transaction printing mode can be extended with an Adobe PDF Print Engine Adobe PDF for IPDS license This license allows you to process PDF containers in the data streams Differences between the two printing modes The transaction printing mode is different
157. g optional Folder N Z fold Half fold 5 N Tri fold in Tri fold out Parallel fold Stacking and sorting Stacking and sorting Finishing optionals Stacker stapler High capacity stacker al _ Sort by set Sort by page Stacker stapler High capacity stacker 4 Offset stacked Stacked For more information on finishing specifications and options see Main hardware parts on page 32 Print job settings on page 242 Finishing and delivery on page 43 Finishing and delivery specifications on page 274 Output settings values and icons on page 246 Chapter 2 Explore the print system 25 imagePRESS C800 Series Color reproduction for your output Color reproduction for your output PRISMAsync color reproduction The color management of PRISMAsync controls the reproduction of colors and handles the conversion of input colors RGB CMYK spot colors to printed colors on paper PRISMAsync has two instruments for easy color management across the entire workflow color presets and media families so that the operator does not need to perform color management tasks on a job by job basis Color experts can use more color management functions with the advanced color management license Color Presets The PRISMAsync color presets simplify the complexity of color management You can select an appropriate color preset when you prepare a print job with a printer driver or PRISMA software An auto
158. gital coated media preprinted media and offset coated media You can use envelopes tab paper and transparencies in most paper trays For covers insert sheets and separator sheets between sets you can use the inserter The following table shows the types of media that paper trays support I m Thin Plain Heavy Coated i Textured Vellum Transparencies 1 7 Color Prepunched Forward order tab pa Reverse order tab pa per pe p i WO Labels 1 2 Bond Letterhead Carbonless a a je Envelope type a 1 Envelope type b 1 Preprinted covers 3 Insert sheets 3 1 Not supported by the inserter 2 Not supported by the internal paper trays 3 The inserter supports insert sheets Make sure that the media you use for the inserter have the insert sheet definition in the media catalog See Settings Editor media attributes on page 294 For more information on media specifications see Consumables on page 185 Paper input specifications on page 270 Supported media types for paper input optionals on page 289 22 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing for your output Finishing for your output If your print system has finishing options you can select staple punch trim booklet and book options in the printer driver the PRISMA software and the control panel NOTE The control panel shows the finishing options that are available on
159. gs too light or too dark 232 Chapter 8 Help imagePRESS C800 Series Fix density not within required range error Fix density not within required range error In exceptional cases the shading correction procedure fails with a density not within required range message If this happens perform the correction procedure to fix the problem Procedure Touch System gt Color adjustment gt Printer calibration details Select Auto gradation adjustment Select Shading correction Press Start printer calibration Follow the instructions on the control panel Touch System gt Color adjustment gt Printer calibration details Deselect Shading correction Select Auto gradation adjustment Press Start printer calibration 10 Follow the instructions on the control panel 11 Close the menu OO Ol Pw Nos After you finish If the Shading correction procedure still fails contact your local service representative Chapter 8 Help 233 imagePRESS C800 Series Fix density not within required range error 234 Chapter 8 Hel P P imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 9 References Job settings Job settings Copy job settings The following tables show the copy job properties you can change Original 1 or 2 sided Original type Job name Separator sheets M S Copy job 11 Off Destination Auto 1 sided Auto Portrait left ii Sc
160. gs and overviews to enable configuration of the print system The overview below shows the setting groups and includes the location and authorization needed to change the settings You can also use the search field at the upper right hand corner of the Settings Editor to access a setting Be aware that not all tabs are searched All staff can view the Settings Editor settings Meaning of the abbreviations the setting is also available on the control panel SA only the system administrator can change the setting KO both the key operator and system administrator can change the setting Access the Settings Editor You can open the Settings Editor when you enter the IP address or the hostname of the controller in the address bar of your web browser The Settings Editor uses the same language as the web browser When you want to change the language of the Settings Editor change the language of the web browser See Settings Editor specifications on page 293 General information Settings and information Location Role Contact information Support gt About KO Overview of system information Support gt About Overview of licenses Support gt Software Basic settings Settings and information Location Role Regional settings Preferences gt System settings KO language of user interface date and time measurement method time zone Software upgrade and download Settings and information Location R
161. has scanned the originals the scan file goes to the destination you indicated 1 or 2 sided Auto 1 sided Auto Portrait left Background Fe Suppression 0 Job name TIFF printing 30 Enter file ID Type Resolution la TIFF Multi Page LZW Zoom Q Fit to page 100 Auto Top right Margin erase Adjust image Color Black amp white Q 0 C8B 0 0 Color 0 Color 0 0 SRGB Save as template For more information see About scan jobs on page 57 Scan job settings on page 240 Use templates for recurring jobs on page 66 Scan subsets combined scanning on page 68 Before you begin Read the instructions detailing how to use the automatic document feeder and the glass plate See Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 59 or Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 61 Procedure DS oF Place a set of originals into the automatic document feeder or place an original on the glass plate Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan Select a scan template Define the original settings in the Original pane 1 Define the output settings in the Output pane 2 Select the destination of the scan file in the Job pane 3 e For scanning to email define the subject of the email the addresses and your account ID For scanning to USB insert the USB drive into the USB port and select the
162. he extra sheets Settings Editor settings and information on page 295 See Below you find the procedure to add separator sheets You add the separator sheets in one of the following locations e List of waiting jobs e List of scheduled jobs A DocBox Procedure Touch Jobs Go to the location of the job Select the job to which you want to add separator sheets Touch Properties or double tap the job to open the Properties window Indicate at the top right corner that you want separator sheets Cl w PA Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 105 imagePRESS C800 Series Change job settings Change job settings Most job settings are created during the job preparation You can decide to change the print job settings after you checked the first set of a print job after a proof or after you print a job ticket You change the settings in one of the following locations e List of scheduled jobs e List of waiting jobs A DocBox User oceadmin Job name Separator sheets Pages 20 Submitted Apr 17 2014 3 35 13 PM Duration 0 13 Print range Label input Default Crystals_A3 ps off All Output 1 or 2 sided Binding edge E A3 100 g m2 TopColor White Portrait left A3 Layout l EI 2 z Normal 100 Center Front 0 0 0 Back 0 0 0 Print delivery Margin erase Adjust image Color flack amp white ji Q ee Stacker stapler u
163. he professional stacker stapler the PUNCH waste csesceeeeeseeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseneeteeeaaes 211 Remove in the standard stacker stapler the punch waste ssssssssssssrsssssrnssrinnssrnnnsrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 213 Keep the print system Clan ceecccceeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeaeee eee eaeee ees aaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeagaeeeeesaaeeeeesaeeeeeneaeeeseneeeeees 214 Cleaning tasks and proceduresecc ici ccdeenteeeec devisees aaaea aa Adzad Ade ie dada eset ee et 214 Cl an the controll panel icita sists ih cida lg e deh eee de ected 215 Clean the glass plate are a ceeeccceesscceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeeesaaaeeeesaaaeeeeaaaeeseaaaeesesaeeseeeeaeeeeeeaaes 216 Clean the automatic document feeder SCANNING ALCa eeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeens 217 Clean the scanning SCNSOSS cecccceeecceeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeeeeaaaeeeeesgaaeesesaaeeeseeaaeeeeseaaeeeeeeaaes 219 Clean the automatic document feeder rOllers ceccccesseceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeenaeeees 220 Clean the inside of the print MOCUIC ccccceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeeeeaeeeetaaeeeeaaaeeegeaaeesesaaeeeeseaeeseenaeeseneaaes 221 Clean the Corona assembly WILES cccececeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeenaaaeeeeeaaeeeesaaeeeeescaeeeseenaeeeeesaees 222 Clean the main unit rollensiwc in tagisiiactedascuid aaa aa naan Eai Naa eine Vaiaata 223 Refresh the fi
164. he results of your settings by page PRISMAprepare provides the following features Basic and advanced imposition functions to prepare the print document on job and page level Create variable data documents WYSIWIG feedback view to show the results of the layout media and finishing settings Access to the media catalog to select the best media for the job Functions to clean scanned documents Functions to optimize PDF documents Export the media catalog to PRISMAsync controllers of black amp white and color systems You can send jobs to the following locations on PRISMAsync a DocBox the list of waiting jobs or the list of scheduled jobs See Job management in the queues on page 99 This generic procedure describes how to prepare and submit a job The online help of PRISMAprepare contains detailed information on the available functions PRISMAprepare Bile Edit View Select Pages Document Tools Help a i a a ti Pa Bi ae RO ha 16 Pages 1 selected 9 Sheets 1 selected 24 The PRISMAprepare interface 1 Open the document in PRISMAprepare 2 Add pages or page ranges if required 3 Define which pages or page ranges need specific layout 4 Select media from the media catalog by page or page range 52 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare A4 Tabs Reverse cycles A3 100 gsm C 43200 95m
165. heduled jobs Output 1 or 2 sided Binding edge Auto Portrait left i Auto Top left Front 0 0 0 Back 0 0 0 Print delivery Adjust image Color Black amp white Q Auto Stacker stapl C88 0 0 Automatic color det Color 0 0 Binding Trimming Punching cesta None Original settings Property Job setting What you can define Original type 1 or 2 sided Copy one or two sides of the original Binding edge Original type Binding position along the long or short side The binding edge automatically adjusts the margin shift direction the orientation and sta ple position Original size Size Standard or custom sizes of originals Background Background Suppression of vague or yellowish background Layout settings Property Job setting What you can define Printing sides 1 or 2 sided Print on one or two sides of the sheet gt 236 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Copy job settings Property Job setting What you can define Binding edge Media Covers Booklet multiple pa ges per sheet Zoom Rough image align ment Precise image adjust ment Delivery settings Property Output location Sort method Offset stacking Advanced settings Binding edge Media Cover Layout Zoom Align Shift Job setting gt Pr
166. high 171 imagePRESS C800 Series Register the color tones for the ACCT function Register the color tones for the ACCT function The automatic correction color tone ACCT function corrects slight color deviations in the color tones that can occur over time In order to enable the ACCT function in the future you must first register the color tones It is recommended to do the registration right after print system installation Auto Correct Color Tone is not active Perform correction 98 The status and options of the automatic correction color tone function Before you begin Perform a printer calibration to make sure that the print system is in optimal condition Procedure See SS Touch System gt Color adjustment Touch Auto Correct Color Tone gt Register targets Select the location in which you want to store the measured values of the color tones Touch OK Select the media IMPORTANT Do not stop the registration procedure before it has completed Touch OK Follow the instructions on the control panel Close the menu 172 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series Correct the color tones with the ACCT function Correct the color tones with the ACCT function To correct slight color deviations in the color tones you can activate the automatic correction color tone ACCT function The ACCT function uses the values of the color tones that are stored during th
167. ht or high temperatures Chapter 5 Print the jobs 131 imagePRESS C800 Series Check and prepare envelopes before loading Check and prepare envelopes before loading Before you load envelopes it is important to check and prepare the envelopes You can load envelopes in all paper trays and the special feeder O IMPORTANT Do not print on the back side of the envelopes the side with the flap Do not load the following types of envelopes This can cause a paper jam dirty printed output or dirty machine parts e Curled creased or folded envelopes e Very thick or thin envelopes e Damp or wet envelopes e Torn envelopes e Irregularly shaped envelopes e Envelopes with clasps or windows e Envelopes that are already sealed e Envelopes with holes or perforations e Envelopes with specially coated surfaces e Envelopes made of surface treated colored paper e Envelopes that are self adhesive and use ink glue or other substances that can melt burn vaporize or emit smells by the heat of the fixing unit approximately 200 C Melted glue can cause sealed envelopes e When there is a temperature difference between the storage location and the location where the envelopes are printed take the envelopes to the print location on time A CAUTION When you handle paper be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames This can cause the paper to ignite which could result
168. ibration procedures Preference settings to define general system defaults the print and scan quality finishing properties and most print languages PostScript PDF Workflow settings to set up the DocBox folders SMB shares fonts scan profiles hotfolders and automated workflows Transaction printing settings to define setups color management image shifting tray mapping and resources Configuration settings to establish the connection with servers to ensure a secure environment to set up the accounting system and automatic language sensing Support settings to view contact and counter information to install licenses to update software to download the printer driver to troubleshoot to generate loggings to save and restore settings for color management Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 183 imagePRESS C800 Series System configuration and maintenance imagePRESS C800 series Media Colour Preferences Workflow Transaction printing Configuration Support Med Media families iJ x 2X A v b amp EB Add Edit Delete Up Down Import Export Restore Printer adjustment Media A4 100g m2 TopColor White A4 135q m2 TopColor White A3 100g m2 TopColor White A3 135g m2 TopColor White Letter 8 5x11 105g m2 TopColor White Letter 8 5x11 135g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 105g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 135g m2 TopColor White A4 tab 223x297 Tab inclusive
169. iginal settings to another printer from the following locations e List of scheduled jobs e List of waiting jobs A DocBox e List of printed jobs NOTE The list of remote printers must be available and configured in the Settings Editor Settings Editor settings and information on page 295 See Ey Preisliste Vespa Classic_2009_PP pdf D 100 g m2 Remote operator 80 55 2 000 ake SEW_Solar Trackingsysteme_EN_Drupa_PP pdf Remote operator EastWest_kalender_select pdf 5 Schedule Jobs Trays By System 62 Copy jobs to other printers Procedure 1 Touch Jobs Go to the location of the jobs 3 Select the jobs you want to send to another printer or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple jobs together Select Copy to from the button bar or from the drop down menu Select a printer from the list or use Other printer to manually enter a printer name 6 Touch OK N o gt Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 113 imagePRESS C800 Series Remove print jobs Remove print jobs You can delete jobs from the following locations e List of printed jobs List of scheduled jobs e List of waiting jobs A DocBox IMPORTANT When PRISMAsync does not automatically remove jobs from the list of printed jobs make sure you remove the printed jobs manually to prevent a full system disc NOTE The list of printed jobs must be ava
170. ihe vei esis 120 INFOPIMATION ccceeesesteeeeeeeeeesssneeeeeeeeeesssssneeeeeees 37 remote MONItON ccecesteeeeeeeeesesssneeeeeeeeeeseee 121 Delivery order COPY JODS morina a RAN 237 print Setting sssssssssessssressinssssrnnsrnnnnerinnnernnnnne 243 Delivery orientation CODY JOD irnir risaiiiiinisruiienieseedin ireid eaen 237 print SCTtING eeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeaaes 243 Density not within required range r 1 0 E EEEE A E E 233 Destination COPY JODS 0s scene daa 238 244 SCAN ODS iriserai 241 Device Link support Advanced color management 27 Device simulation Advanced color management 27 Die set SPECIFICATIONS ccccccccceeessssnteeeeeeeessesneeeeeeeeens 275 DocBox combining JODS IN ee eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeetees 93 COPY JOD Sirini 55 description s sssssssesssriresrirresrrnerrnrnrrrnnnrennnnnnnnn 91 editing JODS N ssssssssssssssssssesnrnnnnerrrnnnnnnennrnnnnnn 92 Mea E E E EE tia detec dee 35 locking JOBS iMiss iaaa 94 page PFOGFAMMING ccccceesssseeeeeeeeeesssseneeeeeees 91 print job settingS ssesssessssresssrnnesrrensrrnesenns 242 printer dr Vef sssssssssssssrsssssrssssrnnssrnnnsrnnessnnnnsnnnn 50 printing jobs frOM ssssesssessssresssirresrrrsssrrnsernns 95 PRISMA prepa e cscccceessceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeees 52 SCAN JODS irapis 57 DP Link support MaE EEE ide soe iden ceehides niveades aces 35 E E shredding I hetsla
171. ilable When enabled PRISMAsync removes the printed jobs after a preset period For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 View the jobs in the queues on page 102 DocBox on page 91 Procedure 1 Press Jobs 2 Go to the location of the jobs 3 Select the jobs you want to combine or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple jobs at once 4 Press Delete 5 Confirm the deletion action 114 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 5 Print the jobs Proofing Proofing Proof and test prints Avoid wasting time and money and do a check print before you start a print job with many sets A check print can result in the decision to change job properties or to adjust image and color settings for one or all jobs There are several methods to check the job definition e Check the first set of a job Make a proof print of a job Set intermediate check prints Make a job ticket print Check first set Especially useful for jobs with many sets you can check the first print set before you print all other sets in one run The print system prints a first set in the following situations e When you indicate the first set check in the printer driver and PRISMAprepare When the workflow profile sets the first set check See Workflow profiles on page 73 When you indicate the first set check in the job property window on the control pan
172. in the media catalog so that the adjustments are applied to all jobs that use the same media You can find the correction values in the system adjustment settings of the Settings Editor Preferences tab For more information see Problem Solving on page 230 Automatic color mismatch correction on page 171 Media for your output on page 21 Before you begin Make sure that all media attributes are correct in the media catalog Procedure 1 Touch System gt Media 2 Select the media from the media catalog 3 Press Curl correction 4 Define the correction factor with the and buttons Start with small increments to avoid paper jams 5 Press OK 176 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series Perform a media registration Perform a media registration The media properties influence the alignment of the images on the printed output To ensure the alignment is correct perform a media registration for the media of the media catalog You can shift the image manually or start the registration wizard The registration wizard includes a registration chart print for analysis For new media use the media registration wizard You can perform a media registration via the Trays or System view The procedure below describes the media registration via the System view The media registration procedure changes the media attributes in the media catalog so that the adjustments are applied to all
173. ination eS Scheduled jobs Binding f No binding Sort a Sort by set Print delivery Stacker stapler lower tray Covers g None Layout Bl Normal Colour Photographic amp content Punching K None Offset stacked Yes Workflow a Page Programmer a Scale 100 Folding ig None Separator sheets BE No Image shift ft Printer default Template Factory default Watermark None 23 The setting parts of the printer driver Before you begin Trimming E No trimming Output orientation Auto Auto Auto Auto Advanced Check if there is a connection from the printer driver to the print system 6 Procedure mor cr Wh gt Click OK 8 Check the document size orientation and binding edge that come from the application 1 and 2 Check the presets 3 Change the settings for one or more presets if required 4 Define the job production settings 7 Check the results in the preview pane 2 Save the settings in a template if required 5 imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs 51 Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare Procedure The optional PRISMAprepare software is an effective and efficient application to clean up documents and make them ready for printing You can preview t
174. ing the power cord frequently e Tripping over the power cord e The power cord is bent near the connection part and continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or the connection part e Applying excessive force on the power plug Moving the machine If you intend to move the machine even to a location on the same floor of your building contact your local authorized Canon dealer beforehand Do not attempt to move the machine yourself Provide Adequate Installation Space Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted operation When the Output Tray A1 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit H1 and control panel are attached 14 Chapter 1 Preface imagePRESS C800 Series Installation precautions 100 mm wm 1 524 mm 60 1 952 mm 76 7 8 1 Make sure to provide at least 800 mm 31 1 2 of space if you attach one or more of the following Paper Folding Unit F1 Professional Puncher C1 Document Insertion Unit M1 or Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 When the Two Knife Booklet Trimmer A1 Booklet Trimmer D1 Saddle Finisher AM2 Paper Folding Unit F1 Perfect Binder D1 Professional Puncher Integration Unit A1 Professional Puncher C1 Document Insertion Unit M1 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit H1 control panel and Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 are attached 800 mm 31 1 2 2 gt 1 765 m
175. int delivery Output location gt Print delivery Sort gt Print delivery Offset stacking gt Print delivery Advanced settings Binding position along the long or short side The binding edge automatically adjusts the margin shift direction the orientation and sta ple position Selection of media for the job e Front and back cover Print on the cover or not e Media for the cover e Booklet properties e Same up copying with a variable number of images e Multiple up copying with a variable number of images e Automatic zoom according to the copy size e Manual zoom from 25 400 See Zoom function on page 250 Image move to corners sides or to the middle of a sheet You can have more space for margins punch holes or staples e Margin shift to define the alignment to wards the binding edge e Image shift to further define the alignment in a vertical direction Different values for front and back sides are available What you can define Selection of the output location The output location supports the finishing methods Sort method by page or by set Stack method with or without an offset Offset stacking depends on the active work flow profile See Workflow profiles on page 73 e Delivery order of the sheets e Delivery position of the sheets e Delivery with rotation Apply these settings for one or more finishing optionals imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 9 Referen
176. int system for these media types Make sure that you select the correct media family and surface type when you add new media to the media catalog in the Settings Editor see Settings Editor media attributes on page 294 If you notice that the media or image quality of the printed output is not as high as it should be perform a correction procedure to adjust the media or image quality e Curled media correction e Media registration for example for new media e Skewed and rotated image correction The correction procedures change the media attributes in the media catalog so that the adjustments are applied to all jobs that use the same media For more information see Problem Solving on page 230 Correct skewed and rotated images on page 179 Perform a media registration on page 177 Correct curled output media on page 176 Media for your output on page 21 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high 175 imagePRESS C800 Series Correct curled output media Correct curled output media Media can arrive curled in the output tray This is caused by temperature differences during the print process You can perform a correction procedure to prevent curled sheets in the output trays The results of the correction are immediately effective for jobs that use these media For media that need a curl correction on the length and width create two different entrances in the media catalog The correction procedure changes the media attributes
177. internal paper trays O IMPORTANT Never place paper or other objects in the empty parts of a paper tray This can cause a paper jam Make sure you follow the instructions carefully When you do not load the media correctly a paper jam dirty machine parts or poor print quality can occur A CAUTION When you handle paper be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper For more information see Access the print module parts on page 228 Paper input specifications on page 270 Consumables on page 185 Supported media types for paper input optionals on page 289 Supported media sizes by paper input optional on page 291 Supported envelope types by paper input optional on page 292 Before you begin e Check and prepare the media See Check and prepare media before loading on page 130 Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 134 e Awake the print system from sleep mode if applicable See Use the energy save modes on page 192 Chapter 5 Print the jobs 135 imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the internal paper trays Procedure 1 Grip the handle and pull out the paper tray un til it stops 2 Remove all media 3 Slide the paper guides to match the media size you want to load O IMPORTANT Slide the guides until they click into place This prevents a paper jam poor print quality and dirty machine parts 4 Place the media stack against the right side of the paper tray O IMPORTANT M
178. inting Stop printing When you want to stop or delay the print production use one of the following functions Stop the print process after the active job set is ready You can change the job settings for the remaining sets Stop the print process as soon as possible for example you notice a problem or see printed output that does not meet your expectations Stop the print process after a specific job is ready You can select this job from the list of scheduled jobs You can resume the print process later if required Frames pdf Select Print now 3 jobs 1 selected sratic 18 2014 ra aso A 31 39 AaB 80 g m3 9 03 10 AM Tapco Was eee iB Se 2 1 SO m a ACS 100 g m2 oceadmin 9 03 11 AM 1 Topcolor White AS Oa B 2 100 para 0 06 Ri A3 100 g m oceadmin 9 03 11 AM L Topcolor White Schedule Jobs Trays system 89 Stop after a job For more information see Control panelon page 36 Schedule on page 122 Procedure 1 Use one of the following options to stop the print process Press the Stop button once to stop the print process after the set is ready The print system stops when the print buffer is empty and has completed a set e Press the Stop button twice to stop the print process as soon as possible The print system stops when the print buffer is empty as soon as possible Touch Stop after job to
179. ions WxDxH 1 530 mm x 934 mm x 1 424 mm 60 1 4 x 36 3 4 x 56 1 8 to the glass plate without control panel and operator attention light Weight Approximately 308 kg 679 Ib PRISMAsync controller Specification Value Description Integrated high performance PRISMAsync color controller for im agePRESS C800 Series Operating system Windows 7 Embedded Processor Intel Core Memory 16 GB Hard disk 3 x 3 5 SATA II 250 GB 7200 RPM Interface Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base T TCP IP LPR LPD 9100 Socket SMB Static IP Auto IP DHCP Page Description Language Adobe PostScript 3 3020 PDF 1 7 Extension level 3 PDF X Op timized PostScript Optimized PDF Adobe PDF Print Engine 3 4 IPDS PDF IPDS PCL gt 268 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Print system specifications Protocols SNMP v1 v2c v3 Host resources MIB System group MIB II Printer MIB Job Monitor MIB Security E shredding HTTPs LDAP SNMP v3 User authentication per user role key operator system administrator service technician Spot color libraries HKS K HKS K 3000 HKS N HKS N 3000 Pantone Goe Uncoa ted Coated Pantone solid Uncoated Coated Pantone solid 336 new Uncoated Coated Options Schedule license Scanning license DocBox license Page Programming license Hotfolders license multiple queue E shredding license PCL6 for transaction printing license IPDS for transaction printing
180. is manual helps you to use the imagePRESS C800 Series The manual contains a description of the product and guidelines to use and operate the imagePRESS C800 Series Definition Attention Getters Parts of this manual require your special attention These parts can provide the following e Additional general information for example information that is useful when you perform a task e Information to prevent personal injuries or property damage Symbols used in this manual The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures restrictions handling precautions and instructions that should be observed for safety Overview of the attention getters Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly To use the machine safely always pay at tention to these warnings WARNING CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly To use the machine safely always pay attention to these cautions IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine correctly and to avoid damaging the ma chine or property NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a procedure Reading these notes is highly recommended Indicates an operation that must not be performed Read these items carefully
181. isher T1 External 2 3 Hole Puncher C1 The following optionals have their own operation guides Perfect Binder D1 High Capacity Stacker G1 Booklet Trimmer D1 Two Knife Booklet Trimmer A1 18 Chapter 1 Preface imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 2 Explore the print system What can this print system do for you What can this print system do for you The imagePRESS C800 Series is an easy to use multitasking print system that offers many useful functions There is one central control panel the single point of control which simplifies the print process The workflow concept places the operator at the control panel in a central position The print operator can manage colors jobs and schedules and last minute job changes from the control panel The workflow concept supports efficient task splitting to make the best use of staff resources and expertise The central media catalog is available across the whole print workflow This ensures first time right output The intelligent color management helps you without an expert color knowledge you can reproduce a high and consistent color quality The input and finishing optionals support many different media types and finishing options The print system can staple fold trim or punch the printed output in various ways You can print professional looking high quality output such as stapled booklets and books with glued preprinted covers
182. ishing and delivery specifications Output Tray A1 Description Output tray to collect printed output Capacity 250 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib bond Paper size Default sizes 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R A5R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR Custom sizes 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 9 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Envelope types ISO C5 162 mm x 229 mm 6 3 8 x 9 No 10 COM 104 7 mm x 241 3 mm 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Monarch 98 4 mm x 190 5 mm 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 DL 110 mm x 220 mm 4 1 3 x 8 2 3 Nagagata 3 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Yougatanaga 120 mm x 235 mm 4 7 x 9 1 4 Kakugata 2 240 mm 332 mm 9 1 2 x 13 Paper weight 52 300 g m 14 Ib bond 110 Ib cover Dimensions WxDxH 422 mm x 382 mm x 175 mm 16 5 8 x 15 x 6 7 8 Weight Approximately 1 2 kg 2 6 Ib Professional Puncher C1 Specification Value Description Punch unit with user replaceable dies for plastic comb twin loop color coil pro click velo and ring binding Paper size EU A4 A4 tabs US LTR LTR tab Paper weight Uncoated paper 75 216 g m 20 Ib bond 80 Ib cover Coated paper 120 216 g m 32 Ib bond 80 Ib cover Specifications depend on die set Punch waste tray capacity Depends on die set Maximum 25 000 sheets 4 hole die set 80 g m 20 Ib bond Power requirement Professional Puncher Integration Unit A1 120 127 V AC 60 Hz 5 5A Professional P
183. ishing for your output on page 23 Color reproduction for your output on page 26 238 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Copy job settings Media for your output on page 21 Chapter 9 References 239 imagePRESS C800 Series Scan job settings Scan job settings The following tables show the scan job properties you can change amp lUlT Original Job 1 or 2 sided Original type Destination v S A Auto 1 sided Auto Portrait left Suppression 0 FIP f File name TIFF_printing_30_20140417_1337S7 tiff Type Resolution Se a B amp TIFF Multi Page LZW Zoom Q Fit to page Auto Top right 100 Adjust image Color Black amp white Q oe C8B 0 0 Color Color 0 0 sRGB Save as ne Original settings Property Job setting What you can define Original type 1 or 2 sided Scan one or two sides of the original Binding edge Original type Binding position along the long or short side The binding edge automatically adjusts the margin shift direction the orientation and sta ple position Original size Size Standard or custom sizes of originals Background Background Suppression of vague or yellowish background Document settings Property Job setting What you can define File type Type e Format of the scan file Compression factor e Quality factor for JPG and PDF sca
184. king for Finisher AM1 Preferences gt System adjustments KO and Saddle Finisher AM2 Job management Settings and information Location Role Availability of the list of printed jobs Preferences gt System settings KO Automatic removal of printed jobs aftera Preferences gt System settings KO preset period E shredding configuration Configuration gt Security KO Banner and trailer sheet per job Preferences gt System settings KO Postscript Settings and information Location Role Behavior when a PostScript error occurs Preferences gt PostScript KO Job time out for PostScript jobs Preferences gt PostScript KO The print process will stop after a preset period and the print system prints an er ror page Page time out for PostScript jobs Preferences gt PostScript KO The print process will stop after a preset period and the print system prints an er ror page Default media Preferences gt PostScript KO color size type and weight Default print settings Preferences gt PostScript KO print resolution 1 sided or 2 sided bind ing edge for 2 sided pages offset stack ing sorting output location stapling Default font substitution Preferences gt PostScript KO Chapter 9 References 301 imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor settings and information PDF Settings and information Location Error pages when a PDF error occurs Preferences gt
185. l name Two knife booklet trimmer Two Knife Booklet Trimmer A1 For more information see Finishing modules specifications on page 274 34 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Overview of licenses Overview of licenses The following licenses are available to increase the functionality and productivity of the print system License Schedule Scan functionality DocBox Page programming Automated workflows Hotfolders E Schredding PCL6 for transaction printing IPDS for transaction printing PDF support for IPDS DPlink Remote Service Remote Manager Advanced color management Asian font sets Scheduler D1 Scanning C1 DocBox E1 Page Programming B1 Multiple queue B1 E Shredding D1 PCL6 TP D1 IPDS D1 PDF for IPDS D1 DP Link E1 Remote Service F1 Remote Manager B1 Advanced Color Management B1 Fontset Simplified Chinese D1 Fontset Traditional Chinese D1 Fontset Japanese D1 Fontset Korean D1 Commercial name More information See Schedule on page 122 See Scan jobs on page 57 See DocBox on page 91 See Page Programming on page 244 See Hotfolders on page 70 and Automated workflows on page 70 See Removal of printed jobs on page 100 See Transaction printing on page 87 See Transaction printing on page 87 See Transaction printing on page 87 Enables integration with Xe rox systems See Enable Remote Service on page 225 See Job m
186. le CartridQe ceccccceeseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeesaaeeeeesaaeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 128 Check the filling level of the waste toner COMtAINGD cceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeenenaaees 129 Handle mediassa Adah we diwk dean Wis Seeteeshaciisdelciee sedate Ae ETET Er eden 130 Check and prepare media before lOaiNg ccceecccceeesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeeesaaeeesesaaeeeeeseeeens 130 Check and prepare envelopes before lOaCiNG cccccceeesceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeesaeeeeesnaeeetenaees 132 Check and prepare transparencies before lOading cccceescceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeseaaeseneeaeeees 134 Load media into the internal Paper trayS cccececceeeessceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeenenaeeeenae 135 Load media into the paper MOUIE ccc ceeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeeesaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaae 137 Load media into the bulk paper MOCUIC eeecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeneaaeeeeesaeeeeesneeeesenaaees 141 Load media into the special fe Cel seecceeesseeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeesesaaaeeeeaaeeseeeaaeeseeeaaeeseneaeeeeneaaeees 145 4 imagePRESS C800 Series Contents Load media into the iINSEStel cccssceeceeeeesseennneeeeeeeessseneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesseseaeeeeeeeesesssaeeeeeseesseseaaees 147 Load envelopes into the internal paper tray
187. lide the paper guides towards and against the me Ta 7 dia stack Slide the right hand paper guide to the media stack and check the size mark for the exact alignment IMPORTANT When you do not align the right hand paper guide properly a paper jam poor print quality or dirty ma chine parts can occur Continue to load the next media stacks of ap proximately 10 mm 0 4 IMPORTANT e Load approximately 550 sheets of media at a time If the paper tray can handle more media the lifter will rise e Make sure the loaded media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark e When you load envelopes make sure the loaded envelope stack does not exceed the envelope loading limit mark Use the correct orientation for the en velopes See Feed instruction for envelopes on page 261 Gently close the paper tray and make sure it clicks into place CAUTION When you close the bulk paper mod ule be careful not to get your fin gers caught This can cause personal injury imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 5 Print the jobs 143 Load media into the bulk paper module After you finish When a paper jam occurs or you notice poor image quality turn over the media stack and reload the media stack Do not reload textured single sided coated or already printed paper to avoid a paper jam For these media take a new stack Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package and st
188. m 69 1 2 Emi 6 445 mm 253 3 4 2 Make sure you provide at least 100 mm 4 of space if none of the Paper Folding Unit F1 Professional Puncher C1 Document Insertion Unit M1 or Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 are attached Chapter 1 Preface 15 imagePRESS C800 Series Handling precautions Handling precautions Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine Some parts inside the machine are subject to high voltages and temperatures Take adequate precautions when inspecting the inside of the machine Do not carry out any inspections that are not described in the manuals for this machine Be careful not to spill liquid or drop any foreign objects such as paper clips or staples inside the machine If a foreign object comes into contact with electrical parts inside the machine it might cause a short circuit and result in a fire or electrical shock If there is smoke or unusual noise immediately turn the main power switch OFF disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and then call your local authorized Canon dealer Using the machine in this state may cause a fire or electrical shock Also avoid placing objects around the power plug so that the machine can be disconnected whenever necessary Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front covers while the machine is in operation This may result in paper jams Do not use flammable sprays such as spray glue near the m
189. mated workflow or a hotfolder can also link a color preset to a job The use of color presets saves time and does not require an in depth knowledge on color Settings Printer connected 134 188 44 108 Ld Resolution Default v On Image smoothing Colour bar Layout Image Loain Left Alignment Centre 4 Information bar None Location Right E a a a A id Alignment Centre Default media 2 sided normal Feros Show less LJ Colour preset Photographic content Media 1 sided or 2 sided Custom E Printer default 5 2 sided Covers Layout Colour Ez Photographic B J E more B Normal amp eer x Yes Page Programmer Scale Folding Separator sheets fa i No us Scale 100 None Ze Ne Image shift Watermark Trimming Output orientation Advanced 5 ype X Auto Auto Sj EA Printer default None Ek No trimming Er Arion 5 Template Factory default Cancel 3 The color settings in the printer driver PRISMAsync includes the following default color presets Office documents This color preset is optimal for color reproduction of text and graphic lines in office documents PRISMAsync converts the colors to more saturated colors for the printed output e Photographic content This color preset is optimal for the reprod
190. n files The compression factor determines the size of the scan file Page size Size Page size of the digital document Resolution Resolution Scan resolution 240 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Scan job settings Property Job setting What you can define Zoom Zoom Rough image align Align ment Quality settings e Automatic zoom according to the digital document size e Manual zoom from 25 400 See Zoom function on page 250 Image move to corners sides or to the middle of a sheet Property Job setting What you can define Margin erase Adjust image Color quality Destination settings Margin erase Adjust image Color Black amp white Margin erase for one or more page edges with a maximum of 100 mm 3 94 Use less margin to ignore punch holes in origi nals Adjustments in brightness contrast and color settings You can see the results in a preview e Color depth selection color black amp white or gray scale e Selection of color profile Property Job setting What you can define Destination Destination Job name Job name File ID Enter file ID For more information see About scan jobs on page 57 Zoom function on page 250 The available destinations depend on the con figuration of the scan function e FTP e USB e Email e SMB New name for the job Numeric value that is part of file name imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 9 Ref
191. n find the correction values in the system adjustment settings of the Settings Editor Preferences tab For more information see Problem Solving on page 230 Media for your output on page 21 Required tools Ruler Procedure 1 Touch System gt Media Select the media from the media catalog Touch Skew correction Follow the instructions on the control panel Pwr Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high 179 imagePRESS C800 Series Correct skewed and rotated images 180 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 7 Maintain the print system System configuration and maintenance System configuration and maintenance Your organization and print environment can ask for a system configuration that meets production and workflow requirements In addition authorization security and sustainability guidelines are important when you establish a print system PRISMAsync and the Settings Editor options and features combine to adjust the print environment according to your requirements a convenient workflow an optimal print productivity and a high print quality The installation of the print system includes most configuration tasks such as definitions of preferences job workflows and print languages The media and color quality requirements are translated into the correct system settings Changing the settings at a later time depends upon the type of print copy or scan job Co
192. n or machine damage e Do not hit the right hand paper guide when you load paper This can cause a malfunction or machine damage ull ia e Never place media or other objects in the empty parts of the paper tray This can cause a paper jam Make sure you follow the instructions carefully When you do not load the media correctly a paper jam dirty machine parts or poor print quality can occur CAUTION When you handle paper be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper For more information see Chapter 5 Print the jobs 137 imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the paper module Paper module on page 38 Paper input specifications on page 270 Consumables on page 185 Supported media types for paper input optionals on page 289 Supported media sizes by paper input optional on page 291 Supported envelope types by paper input optional on page 292 Before you begin Check and prepare the media See Check and prepare media before loading on page 130 Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 132 Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 134 Awake the print system from sleep mode if applicable See Use the energy save modes on page 192 Procedure 1 Press the button 1 to open the paper tray 2 2 Lift the feeding support roller and remove all media When the media size does not change continue with step 9 otherwise go to step 3 3 Slide the right hand pape
193. n the Settings Editor Perform a printer calibration daily followed by a media family calibration for each media family For more information see Calibrate the printer on page 162 Calibrate the media family on page 163 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high 161 imagePRESS C800 Series Calibrate the printer Calibrate the printer Calibrate the printer when you see the calibration indicator on the right hand side of the dashboard See About calibration on page 160 O IMPORTANT You are strongly advised to perform a daily printer calibration Manual adjustment actions Start printer calibration Calibrate media family a 7 Printer calibration details Edit CMYK curves manually A 7 aA Sree Se Qlik aui gradation adjustment Ka n Auto Correct Color Tone Shading correction Upcoming calibration today Reset calibration color curves of the printer B Trapping presets editor f Q Schedule Jobs Trays Bs System 93 The standard printer calibration procedure For more information see About calibration on page 160 Calibrate the media family on page 163 Calibrate for maximum print quality on page 165 Before you begin Media for calibration Prepare calibration media according to the calibration media specifications Media for calibration on page 161 See Procedure 1 Load the calibration media 2 Touch the calibration indicator or go to System
194. nd push up the staple unit 2 1 Saddle stitch unit 2 Staple unit 3 Remove the empty staple cartridges 1 and click the new staple cartridges into its place 2 E NOTE Replace both staple cartridges You can only insert one staple cartridge at a time 4 Pull the staple unit towards you and push down the staple unit in its original position 1 Push the saddle stitch unit in its original posi tion 2 CAUTION When you push the saddle stitch unit to its original position be care ful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury 5 Close the front cover CAUTION When you close the front cover of the stacker stapler be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury 208 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Remove the staple waste Remove the staple waste The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the staple waste tray is full You can find the staple waste tray in the stacker stapler 117 Location of the staple waste tray For more information see Check the filling level of the staple cartridge on page 128 Stacker stapler on page 43 System monitoring on page 120 Procedure 1 Open the front cover of the stacker stapler z 2 Pull out the staple waste tray at the bottom of the front side of the staple unit 3 Discard the staple waste CAUTION When you discard the staple waste be careful not to tou
195. nfiguration tasks for operators The control panel allows the print operator to adjust the print quality and workflow with respect to the daily print operation The print operator can for example add temporary media to the media catalog change the workflow profile or start a daily printer calibration Operators can access the Settings Editor to view the system configuration lc O f Zz A Receive n Print g Output Print jobs to Scheduled jobs Next tray after each job Workfiow profie Standard Language Engish us Intermediate check print DA a Warning time 10 minutes Local key operator settings amp ee Job name truncation 200 YVVYYYYYYYY Operator panel settings Shut down system 9 D Schedule Jobs Trays By System 101 The system setup settings on the control panel Configuration tasks for the system administrator and key operator Most configuration tasks ask for a system administrator or key operator login The configuration settings are available via a web based configuration tool the Settings Editor Both the key operator and the system administrator can change settings in the Settings Editor Part of the Setting Editor settings and information is also available on the System view of the control panel You need a key operator or system administrator password to change these settings 182 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Sys
196. ng 256 feed instruction for stapling s eeeee 253 feed instruction for tri fold in 258 feed instruction for tri fold OUt cc eee 258 feed instruction for Z fOId cccccccesssssnteeees 257 Usage ON 5 sds vi sigs cas oct chase vensbeccsi es sles vaasiecceissnes xt 61 ZOOM FUNCOM isiin inernetis adaa iea 250 H High capacity stacker commercial NAMEC L ccsccccceeessssttteeeeeeeesssssnaeees 33 Koret iake a EE A 33 Hotfolder Creati Missies sea a E aiK 70 USO Ofore e ederdl niidec tc dex tena 70 l Image adjustment transaction printing MOde sssssssesseeseerseeeeen 89 Image alignment a OAO o A 236 print SCtthNG ccccceeessssstteeeeeeessssssseeeeeeeees 242 Scan JODS is sis cassettes es eth ces i ett 240 Image quality COPY JODS ccccceseeeeeeeeesssseeteeeeeeeeeessssnaneeeenenss 238 Meda eeeeerres reeerre cerecre eN 21 media registration sssssssssssssisssrirsssrerssrrenn 177 imagePRESS C800 Series Index print SOTHING sucesso aiitie eminent 243 IN JOD WOrkfIOW c cceeeeeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 28 relationship with media 175 printer CLiIVEN cece eee eeteeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 50 SCAN JODS iirinn oaa i 241 PRISMAprepare ssssssesssssssssesssrnsssrnnssrnnnerenesenns 52 Information bar Job status indicator Advanced color management 27 ICONS eaaa R EREE 264 COPY 10 OLSA 238 Job ticket print SettiN g is ieina 243 automated workfloW sssssssssssssisssss
197. ng preset on page 174 See An uneven density occurs 1 Perform the professional Auto gradation adjustment proce dure 2 Perform the Shading correction procedure About calibration on page 160 See Gradation problem occurs 1 Reset the Auto gradation adjustment calibration curves 2 Perform the Auto gradation adjustment procedure About calibration on page 160 See Temperature or humidity Perform the standard or professional Auto gradation adjustment changes significantly in the procedure print environment About calibration on page 160 See Uneven color planes occur The Shading correction procedure assures consistent even color planes on the output About calibration on page 160 See Slight color tone deviations When printer calibration automatic gradation adjustment and me over time dia family calibration cannot correct the slight colour deviations you can use the automatic correction color tone ACCT function See Register the color tones for the ACCT function on page 172 See Correct the color tones with the ACCT function on page 173 When also the ACCT function cannot fix the color tone deviations contact your local service representative Chapter 8 Help 231 imagePRESS C800 Series Optimize the scan quality of the print system Optimize the scan quality of the print system The print system detects photos rasters and fine lines on the originals and makes sure that the copy and scan job have
198. ning time The dashboard and the operator attention light warn you when the schedule predicts an operator intervention You can change or disable the warning time For more information see System monitoring on page 120 Status indicators on page 264 Schedule on page 122 Procedure 1 Touch System gt Setup gt Warning time 2 Touch Warning in advance to enable or disable the function 3 Touch the or button to decrease or increase the warning time in increments of 1 minute Set a time from 1 60 minutes 4 Press OK 82 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Change the system language Change the system language You can change the language of the control panel Da ce tina Italiano Suomi Dansk Magyar Svenska Nederlands p TERI pi E oeutsch ili Cia EE Norsk Bas EE commu Polski Fs e 20 English US BL E isa Portugu s El roos Pyccxanit 37 Overview of the available languages Procedure 1 Touch System gt Setup gt Language 2 Select the language 3 Press OK imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 83 Use of shorter job names Use of shorter job names When the job name is too long to display on the control panel PRISMAsync shortens the job name You can determine how PRISMAsync shortens the job names
199. ns 5 Make the adjustments Use the color slide bars to adjust the curves by color Use the and sign to the right of the K bar to adjust the density in one step 6 Touch Advanced mode at the upper right corner of the view if required The window opens with the color Cyan On the right hand side you can select the color On the left hand side you can select the areas Define the clipping ranges with the Color clipping settings if required Adjust the calibrated CMYK curve with the three control points on the CMYK curves if required Repeat step 3 8 for each media family halftone combination 0 Save the adjustments as a preset for later use if required oe 170 Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high imagePRESS C800 Series Automatic color mismatch correction Automatic color mismatch correction When the four different colors are not aligned correctly use the automatic color mismatch correction to improve the alignment NOTE You cannot perform the automatic color mismatch correction when the print system is printing For more information see Problem Solving on page 230 Procedure Touch System gt Maintenance Touch Start maintenance Touch Auto color mismatch correction Follow the instructions on the control panel Close the menu Gl a T After you finish If the procedure displays an engine error contact your local service representative Chapter 6 Keep the image quality
200. ns 100 license EE E E dics 35 enable list of printed jobS sssscssssssesseessseeees 100 Rendering intent hotfolder CreatiONn cscecessceesseseseesesnees 70 description fees EnA EEn EE Sa EEE EEEE EESE AE 266 settings and information sccccssssssessssesseeeee 295 Resolution settings ON control panel 183 scat JODS a 8 nsdn ake cee aun 240 Specifications 293 Restart EE ciadsaassrseicsenseaiieosssacasevisssdeastaaivonsanaaye 183 Print SYStE Mirianin adana 191 transaction printing SetupS c sssssssseeeeee 0 88 Shading correction S OPON Aoa a a e cerere rt ce 233 Saddle stitch unit Skewed and rotated images location professional stacker stapler RROA 43 COPOCTION ersari 179 location standard stacker stapler 45 Sleep button Scan jobs VOCATION eee eeeeeeeteeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeteaeeteaeeeeeaeeeeaeeteaeeess 36 combined SCAN JOD ceececeeeeeses eee 68 Sleep mode CSS TIDE Ossian ctiarpiacdsathveiiedeptataisabeaeenius 57 print SYSTEM eesssstseesssteeessnteeeesntteeesntteteaniaes 192 CGSHNBEOiiehncintknnmatmatiastnaeinetancnans 57 Sorting optimizing scan quality Sk sla eee EAEE 099 copy jobs Pec eee eee AAAA 237 page PFOGrAMMING cssceccssecessecesseeeesecesseeeseees 68 0 0 410 9 Leeeerpereeer perenne prerereer rr errr rrr errterreortrererccer 25 start a SCAN jOD e csecccsecscsecscsecseseesessecesecesseeeeeees 64 print SCTLING 2 0 eee ee eeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 243 starting at automatic document fee
201. ns on bright white paper No black and white point compensation is applied so the precise input paper color is simulated on the used media Perceptual Mainly suitable for photographic input The colors are mapped in a continuous way and color nuances are recognized White and black point compensation is applied e Saturation Mainly suitable to obtain highly saturated colors and business graphics Out of gamut colors are mapped to more saturated colors White and black point compensation is applied Spot Colors Spot colors standardize and predict colors so that output colors always match a specific color value Spot colors allow the printing of unique brand colors for logos or business graphics Spot colors are converted to the proper CMYK output color value via spot color tables or spot color libraries 266 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series More PRISMAsync color information You find the spot color definitions in the Settings Editor To select the most appropriate color a patch chart print is available Use this print as a spot color representation on the media you use New or changed spot colors are stored in a custom spot color library You can import or export spot color libraries Color mapping Use color mapping to convert RGB and CMYK color input values to specific output colors for example your corporate color Color mappings are useful to map colors in the input file to a fixed spot color of a spot color lib
202. nting gt IPDS setup Transaction printing gt PCL setup Transaction printing gt IPDS setup Transaction printing gt PCL setup Transaction printing gt IPDS setup Transaction printing gt IPDS setup Transaction printing gt IPDS setup Transaction printing gt PCL setup Transaction printing gt IPDS setup Transaction printing gt PCL setup Transaction printing gt IPDS setup Transaction printing gt Resource man agement Preferences gt Print job defaults Preferences gt Print job defaults Preferences gt Print job defaults Preferences gt Print job defaults Preferences gt System adjustments Tts rate KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO 300 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor settings and information Stacking Settings and information Location Feed direction of A4 LTR output in the Preferences gt Print job defaults KO stacker stapler Face and header orientation in the output Preferences gt Print job defaults KO trays of stacking stapler Delivery order of the output sheets Preferences gt Print job defaults KO Offset stacking on the output tray Preferences gt System adjustments KO Full tray behavior stack eject or change Preferences gt System adjustments KO output tray High volume stac
203. ocument feeder Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs 59 imagePRESS C800 Series Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan 2 Place the originals face up into the originals tray the originals input indicator illuminates green The position of the originals influences the sta ple fold and punch location See Feed direc tion on page 251 CAUTION Do not insert your hands in the gap of the originals tray This can cause personal injury 3 Define the copy or scan settings and touch Start When the original receiving tray detects the SEES scanned originals the originals output indica FF tor illuminates white 4 Remove the scanned originals from the origi nals receiving tray when the originals output indicator blinks For more information see Automatic document feeder on page 41 Paper input specifications on page 270 Feed direction on page 251 60 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Use the glass plate to copy or scan Use the glass plate to copy or scan You must use the glass plate to scan a page of a magazine or book a heavy or delicate document or a transparency The scan area detects the following original sizes A3 A4 A4R A5 AD5R 11 x 17 LTR LTRR SMT SMTR 1 Lift the automatic document feeder approxi mately 300 mm 11 8 to allow the sensor to detect the size of the original 2 Place and align an original face down The position of
204. ode The transaction printing mode is active See Transaction is active printing on page 87 gt 120 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series System monitoring fan Description of the dashboard parts 2 Name of the active job or streaming job for transaction printing mode In addition the dashboard shows the progress of the job number of completed sets or records and the total job length 3 Status color of the print system 4 Additional information and messages such as Remote monitor Maintenance tasks to perform Printer calibration to perform Status of the finisher supplies of the staple cartridges Status of the toner cartridges Other instructions For more information see Status indicators on page 264 Using the remote monitor you can access the print system from another location via a networked workstation or a tablet The remote monitor shows the status of the print system and can also alert you when you need to intervene to prevent the print system from stopping Remote Monitor Windows Internet Explorer 5 x Connected to Load A4 Top Color 100 A4 D 100 g m2 Top Color White 70 Remote monitor The remote monitor shows the following information e The control panel dashboard e A 30 minute timeline For more information see Remote monitor specifications on page 288 imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 5 Print the jobs 121 Schedule Schedule The optional s
205. of scheduled jobs Support gt Troubleshooting KO 302 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor settings and information Settings and information Location Role Removal of waiting jobs Support gt Troubleshooting KO Restore factory default settings or factory Support gt Troubleshooting KO default color settings Save current system settings Support gt Troubleshooting KO Restore previous system settings Support gt Troubleshooting KO Export or import of color settings Support gt Troubleshooting KO Chapter 9 References 303 imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor settings and information 304 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Index Index A Account ID Ce TIMI ON se ssecccec ces ccce sacs cdce aa 80 Accounting COMCE Disini aa aa 80 mode SEIECTION cccccececeeesessssteeeeeeeeessseneeeeeees 80 ACCT COrrectiOM seista aeaa a era En E ERE 173 Registration s sssssesssssesssiresrsrrnnrrrnnernenernenne 172 Advanced color management COSCIIPTION ccceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeetenaeeeteee 27 Alignment tray Special FECL eeecceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeees 42 Asian font sets liGENSC istics ed eek ees 35 Automated workflow OEO EE E eee ee A E 70 description s sssssssssrssesererernnnnrrnnnrrnnnnrennnnnnnnn 70 HOtfOlIGOM ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeess 70 LPR COMMANG eriin
206. of the first record e Interrupt the print process after a certain record and resume the print process of the job later e Print a range of records Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 71 imagePRESS C800 Series Automated workflows Change the settings of the job Be aware that when you change settings of a PDF VT job these settings are applicable to all records of the job NOTE Page programming is not available for PDF VT jobs 72 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Workflow profiles Workflow profiles A workflow profile determines the route of jobs when they arrive on the PRISMAsync controller PRISMAsync provides several default workflow profiles to manage your work load on the control panel Workflow profiles make it possible to plan your jobs in a flexible way You select a workflow profile on the control panel and if required adjust the attributes of the workflow profile Then this custom workflow profile is completely fitted to your workflow Fa Receive L Print Output Destination of print job Confirm start of job Next output tray Scheduled jobs K o After each job DS ics Destination of DocBox job Check first set Offset stacking Scheduled jobs R As in job A Sets asin job S Oou 34 Workflow profile attributes Below you find the descriptions of the default workflow profiles Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 73 imageP
207. ofessional stacker StaPler ccscccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeee ee aaeeeeesaaeeeeesaaeeesaaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeseeeaaeeenia 43 Standard stacker staplefisx seis secant dein eae hieseeleene te neesdee des dbue iveri neake diaaa dEi aoada aeina 45 Professional PUumCW ens sss sisacdescascgchcssccutea cast achuessendecsceechs cates dos dactbinenseeei se deteiseddeteaysetsteecetee sede deena 46 Folder aes secu cecsccccsces cata sstee secede E a E I 47 QUtDUT Tay cessaire ie ee ean eee epee sta E a r aa A sain eaves 48 Chapter 3 Prepare th JODS nne eaae ea e aAa EEEE Aaaa EEan A aaa AAEEen 49 Prepare print ODS vives ssice secccisisde eis dee eee dele id acts ne at a nt al eae 50 Prepare print jobs with the printer Criver ccccscceceeseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeseeaeeeeneae 50 Prepare print jobs with PRISMA prepa e cccceccsceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeesaaaeeeesaaeeseeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeea 52 Print a file froM a USB CLive cccscccccceeeessseseeeeeeeeeeesseeneeeeeeeeesssceeneeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeesssssenaaeeeeeeess 54 Prepare COPY ANC SCAN JODS eeeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaaeeeesaaaeeeesaaaee eg aaaeseaaaaeeeseaaeeseseaaeeeeesaaeeesenaeeseneaaes 55 Copy JODS ieee cae ede eae eile peel ete ae dain ai ee 55 SCAM ODS veh eesce cee eayii lees asec asia ek ander cee a eee ee Agee cena E eens nate 57 Use the automatic document feeder to COPY OF SCA
208. ole Upload license file Support gt Software SA Software upgrade Support gt Software updates SA Printer driver download Support gt Software KO Chapter 9 References 295 imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor settings and information Connectivity Settings and information Location Integration into the network Configuration gt Connectivity SA location hostname MAC address net work interface card TCP IP connection Configuration gt Connectivity SA DHCP server IP address Subnet mask Default gateway DNS server DHCP serv er SNMP SNMP v1 v2c and SNMP v3 sup Configuration gt Connectivity SA port Proxy server connection Configuration gt Connectivity SA Web service printing Configuration gt Connectivity SA IPP support for DPlink Configuration gt Connectivity SA Authorization Settings and information Location Role Passwords for system administrators key Configuration gt Security SA operators maintenance for operator tasks PRISMAsync remote manager Certificates Settings and information Location Certificates for secure http https Configuration gt Security SA Print workflows Settings and information Location Role Set up of an automated workflow Workflow gt Automated workflows KO An automated workflow is a collection of preset settings for jobs One default auto mated workflow is available
209. on page 182 A WARNING e When you clean the machine first turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord Failure to observe these steps can result in a fire or electrical shock Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly and clean the area around the base of the power plug s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp dusty or smoky location dust can build up around the power plug and become damp This can cause a short circuit and may result in a fire O IMPORTANT Do not dampen the cloth with too much water This can damage prints or machine parts Do not use alcohol benzene paint thinner or other solvents to clean machine parts This can damage plastic machine parts The following procedures are described in this chapter Clean the control panelon page 215 Clean the glass plate area on page 216 Clean the scanning sensors on page 219 Clean the automatic document feeder scanning area on page 217 Clean the automatic document feeder rollers on page 220 Clean the inside of the print module on page 221 Clean the corona assembly wires on page 222 Clean the main unit rollers on page 223 Refresh the fixing belt on page 224 214 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Clean the control panel Clean the control panel When the scr
210. ons to select all or some types of jobs in a job list For example you can select all jobs in the list of waiting jobs that are ready for printing and use specific media You can also select jobs with a specific label You can add a label to a job via a printer driver setting a job ticket or an automated workflow cf Ey x iar Properties Delete Bundle Scheduled jobs A3_002p pdf oceadmin p T Jobs with available media oceadmin B A4_Duplex_020p ps AL 30bs with tabet Crystals_A3 ps Aor 17 2014 T j 2 AELE 0 01 A3 100 g m Cie inio TopColor White 123_VPR_CMYK_15Ocoated_1 1_F_x3 17 2014 eats L1 1_F_x3 pdf 10 250 sd fe 0 41 AaB 100 o m oceadmin 11 31 43 AM edra E sera 2 1 pa I o A3 100 g m oceadmin 11 42 49 AM ee i B Ar 20 1 Speier 0 01 A404 100 g m2 oceadmin 1 42 TopColor White Tr ane re a ip eea D PEA oceadmin Remaining se 31 TopColor White schedule Jobs Trays system 51 The selection function in the list of waiting jobs Send jobs to other printers From the control panel of a PRISMAsync printer you can send jobs to any other printer The list of remote printers must be enabled and configured in the Settings Editor see Settings Editor settings and information on page 295 PRISMAsync remote manager With PRISMAsync remote manage
211. or other countries Copyright 2007 08 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Protected by U S Patents 5 737 599 5 781 785 5 819 301 5 929 866 5 943 063 6 073 148 6 515 763 6 639 593 6 754 382 7 046 403 7 213 269 7 242 415 Patents pending in the U S and other countries Chapter 1 Preface 9 imagePRESS C800 Series Trademarks All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems implementation of the PostScript language interpreter Except as otherwise stated any reference to a PostScript printing device PostScript display device or similar item refers to a printing device display device or item respectively that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language Adobe the Adobe logo PostScript the PostScript logo and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective o
212. ore the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight or high temperatures 144 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the special feeder Load media into the special feeder The special feeder can hold up to 100 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond approximately 10 mm 4 high The special feeder feeds the media face up O IMPORTANT Do not load different sizes or types of media at the same time It is very important that you use the correct job settings for media such as heavy paper or transparencies The fixing unit can become dirty which may require a service visit Moreover the image quality can become poor Feed vellum media one sheet at a time and remove each sheet after delivery in the output tray When you load several sheets together a paper jam can occur e When you make two sided prints printed output can crease depending on the moisture absorption of the media e When heavy media does not pass through properly feed the sheets one by one e When envelopes do not pass through properly feed the envelopes one by one Do not collect more than ten printed envelopes in the output tray Envelopes can crease during the print process Make sure you follow the instructions carefully When you do not load media correctly a paper jam dirty machine parts or poor print quality can occur A CAUTION When you handle paper be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper
213. other job in the DocBox e Print it with priority Configure the DocBox with the Settings Editor System configuration on page 182 For more information see Operating concept on page 28 Job management in the queues on page 99 Print job settings on page 242 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 91 imagePRESS C800 Series Change a DocBox job Change a DocBox job You can change the settings of a DocBox job The same job settings are available in the list of waiting jobs With the optional Page programming function you can define the layout and finishing of subsets and page ranges Use the list button Ready gt localuser 1 Apr 17 2014 2 29 49 PM 0 01 Copy job to toggle between the list and the thumbnail view Separator sheets Off Output 1 or 2 sided E 1 sided Binding edge E Portrait left i Stacker stapler upp Top left Adjust image v 0 0 Binding S Method None Folding SI Lax Folding None O A4D 100 g m2 TopColor White NN 43 Job settings in DocBox For more information see DocBox on page 91 Print job settings on page 242 Use page programming on page 107 Procedure O0 Ose ON Touch Jobs gt DocBox Select the DocBox folder that contains the job you want to edit Enter a PIN if requested Select the job you want to change Touch Properties or
214. output Glass plate Automatic document feeder il asco BCD ABCD 131 Leading edge length 1 and n feed direction 2 Ny 258 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Feed direction for the inserter Feed direction for the inserter Stapling The following table shows how to feed insert sheets in relation to the staple position Staple position A4 LTR A3 11 x 17 7 ABC ABC ABC ABC Chapter 9 References 259 imagePRESS C800 Series Feed direction for the inserter Staple position A4 LTR A3 11 x 17 Orientation Orientation ABC ABC ABC ABC 260 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Feed instruction for envelopes Feed instruction for envelopes The following tables show how to feed the envelopes in the paper trays Internal paper tray l 132 Nagagata 3 Kakugata 2 133 No 10 COM10 ISO C5 DL Monarch Yougata naga 3 Paper module jE
215. p right A Chapter 9 References 253 imagePRESS C800 Series Feed direction for stapling Staple position A4 LTR A3 11 x 17 Orientation Staple setting Orientation Staple setting s 2 staples ABC 8 Left edge gt 2 staples g Right edge A s 2 staples Y Left edge ABC gt 2 staples 3 Right edge ay XN 1 staple F 1 staple ae Sun Top right Top left 1 staple a Bottom right ay l 2 staples AT MA Right edge N 1 staple 1 staple ABC z Top left gt 9A Top right 1 staple lt Bottom right ive A l 2 staples ABC DEA Right edge l 254 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Se
216. page 128 Professional stacker stapler on page 43 System monitoring on page 120 204 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Replace in the standard stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover of the stacker stapler 2 Hold the green tab of the staple case and pull it mey out 3 Push on both sides of the staple case 1 and release the staple case 2 4 Insert and fix a new staple cartridge 1 and push the staple cartridge to click it into its place 2 5 Remove the seal that holds the staples togeth er W IMPORTANT Make sure you pull the seal straight out to avoid tearing Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 205 imagePRESS C800 Series Replace in the standard stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit 6 Gently push the staple case into the staple unit and push down firmly into its place 7 Close the front cover of the stacker stapler The stapler unit may staple to reposition the staples CAUTION When you close the front cover of the stacker stapler be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury 206 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Replace in the standard stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit Replace in the standard stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit The dashboard of the control p
217. pal e cccesescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 52 Color profile SCAN JODS cccccseeeeeesseeenneeeeeeeeesseeneeeeeeeeseseee 241 Color quality COPY JODSi waned sncdnntacnddawiaawiinnns 238 print SCttING eee ceeeeeeecseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeees 243 SCAN J OWS vase sacvetcecessasanscessarninavansneconcecaieavseenaees 241 Color tones COrreCtlOniiz civinise ici teed hens ea 173 Registratie ireua 172 Color mMm n g mMeNtsisoptppp tappes 26 Compression factor SCAN JODS iiinn a 240 Consumables recommended Media cceescceeeeeseeeeeeeees 185 staple cartridges for saddle stitch unit 187 staple cartridges for staple unit 187 toner CArtridGeS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 185 waste toner CONTAINEL ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 186 Control panel adjustment of readability eee 85 ClEANING e Asien ein ee ee cee 215 definition of trapping preset 243 DOCBOX ccssccssteeeeeeessseseeeeeeeeeesssseneeeeseeesssssnneees 91 error recovery transaction print jobs 89 FINISHING OPTIONS ceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 image shift transaction print jobs 89 JOD management ON ccceessssteeeeeeeesssssneeeeeeees 73 JOD NAMES ccceceesessteeeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeessssnenenees 84 key Operator taskS eccceeesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 29 lANQUA GEL ieee ees dee ces dete cced eeeeedet nese neice 83 last minute print settings 242 JOG ATO
218. pp 5 Default Color Binding Trimming Punching Method None Folding None Punching None 56 Print job settings For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 Print job settings on page 242 Change a DocBox job on page 92 Procedure 1 Press Jobs 2 Go to the location of the job 3 Select the job you want to change 4 Touch Properties or double tap the job to open the Properties window 5 Check the job information in the Original pane 1 6 Change the settings in the Output pane 2 7 Change the settings in the Job pane 3 8 Use the optional Page programming function 5 if required 9 Check the results of the changed settings in the preview pane 4 10 Touch OK 5 106 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Use page programming Use page programming With the optional page programming function you can create subsets and page ranges to apply different layout media and finishing settings within the job The page programming window alerts you when you create settings that do not match job properties S lc is sll kl Page programming User oceadmin Pages 11 LS Submitted Apr 17 2014 3 35 13 PM Duration 1 09 Label input Default Mixed vak 123_VPR_CMYK_ISOcoated_1 1_F_x3 pdf _ Mixed values Output 1 or 2 sided g Bj Portrait lefi A4 tab 223x
219. preprinted covers and insert sheets 15 Professional puncher to punch holes in the printed output 16 Perfect binder to create perfect bound and trimmed books 17 High capacity stacker to stack large piles of output 18 Folder to fold the output in various ways 19 Stacker stapler to staple and stack the printed output A saddle stitch unit creates sad dle stitched booklets A punch unit punches printed output 20 Booklet trimmer to trim the leading edge of booklets 21 Two knife trimmer to trim the top and bottom edges of booklets Commercial names of paper input optionals Automatic document feeder Duplex Color Image Reader Unit H1 Printer cover Printer Cover F1 Special feeder Stack Bypass B1 Paper module Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 Bulk paper module POD Deck Lite B1 Inserter Document Insertion Unit M1 For more information see Paper input specifications on page 270 Commercial names of finishing optionals Optional Commercial name Output tray Output Tray A1 Professional puncher Professional Puncher C1 Perfect binder Perfect Binder D1 High capacity stacker High Capacity Stacker G1 Folder Paper Folding Unit F1 Stacker stapler Professional stacker stapler Finisher AM1 or Saddle Finisher AM2 Standard stacker stapler Staple Finisher T1 or Booklet Finisher T1 Booklet trimmer Booklet Trimmer D1 Chapter 2 Explore the print system 33 imagePRESS C800 Series Main hardware parts Optional Commercia
220. ps az Sp cificati NS n Sues lena 270 Print Setti Giese sceeciveccediesschehievieia cnt aedenieiets 242 i Paper module quality PEE A T 21 slip parted ene lopis ennnen 292 registration ances aay Scapulars ae 175 177 daipperedimedinecs econne cameos 289 291 relationship with Media cceeseeeeeeeeees 175 Paper module Supported envelopes Dy papt nputopiianal commercial NAMe sssssssssssssissrrssrrsrrerrrnrrrenens 33 a 5 feed instruction of envelopes 261 Supponad Siz8 Dy Papel inpMvonuaniel its loading Media into eceeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeee 137 Supported types RY paper inpulopuonale 202 parts a eeaeee eee ens eae 38 Paper tray button N locatio a eeccceceesessteneeeeeeeeesseseneeeeeeeeesssssneeeeeeess 36 Named color profile import and export Paper tray Advanced color manageMent ccsceeeeees 27 assigning media tO cece ceases eeee nee eee 97 Number of sets feed instruction Of tab PaPel cece 263 COPY ODS aay cide chen 238 244 MINGIGAUONS A E E 265 loading while printing ssssesssesssssssrrssrsenns 125 o Paper trays media assignment via schedule 125 Operator attention light media assignment via Trays view 97 lOCATION Lc eeeececeeesessesneeeeeeeeesseseneeeeeeeessssssnaeeeeeeess 32 PDF for IPDS Optionals eet e eee ee Te een ee een en enn 35 operation QUICES ccccsseeeeeeeeessesteeeeeeeeesees 18 PDF VT Original size and type ASSElIPH ON accakenGinsekonueuehwaiutnn 71 COPY 2 eet ee 2
221. r AM2 a Description internal parts of stacker stapler 1 Punch waste tray to collect the punch waste 2 Staple waste tray to collect the staple waste See for specifications Finishing and delivery specifications on page 274 Finishing for your output on page 23 44 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Standard stacker stapler Standard stacker stapler There are two standard stacker stapler configurations the stacker stapler with and without a booklet maker The booklet maker folds and staples booklets Both finisher configurations can enable the optional punch unit to punch two three or four holes in the printed output The dashboard of the control panel displays the status of the staple cartridges When the color of the staple icon is orange or red the staple cartridge needs replacement See System monitoring on page 120 17 Standard stacker stapler with and without booklet maker Description stacker stapler 1 Cover to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs 2 Punch unit cover to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs 3 Punch unit cover to remove the punch waste or to access the paper path when a pa per jam occurs 4 Cover to access the area where you replace staple cartridges clear a paper jam or clear a staple jam Booklet tray
222. r guide to the right hand side of the paper tray 138 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the paper module 4 Squeeze the lever and slide the paper guides so that there is enough space to load the me dia 5 Fold down the right hand paper guide when the media size is more than 457 mm 18 6 Load a media stack of approximately 10 mm 0 4 7 Squeeze the lever and slide the paper guides against the media stack and check the size mark for the exact alignment 8 Slide the right hand paper guide towards the media stack Chapter 5 Print the jobs 139 imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the paper module 9 Continue to load the next media stacks of ap proximately 10 mm 0 4 1 and lower the feeding support roller 2 when ready O IMPORTANT e Make sure the loaded media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark 75 Make sure the loaded envelope stack does not exceed the enve lope loading limit mark Load a maximum of approximately 30 envelopes Use the correct orien tation for the envelopes See Feed instruction for envelopes on page 261 10 Gently close the paper tray and make sure it clicks into place A CAUTION When you close the paper tray be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal in jury After you finish When a paper jam occurs or you notice poor image quality turn over the media stack and
223. r mismat h correctio Mvision aia na a aaa A a E Eara Naia 171 Register the color tones for the ACCT function ssssssssssssssrssssinsssrnnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 172 Correct the color tones with the ACCT function ssesssssssssssssresssinsssnnnnssnnnnntnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnn na 173 Create a trapping PreSetscccciscscccceis ceccssseccengasedenanatodevs cantacecsacqedeebantedueaduedeeseceees shucueds ceseseestesaneeiocamencien 174 Adjust the print quality for MeCIa ecccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee eee neee eee saeee eee aaeeeenaaaeeeeeaaaeeeeaaeeeeessaaeeeeseaeeeeneaees 175 About print quality for Me C1a ccceceeeesceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeee eee aaeee ee aaeee ees aaeeeeeaaaeeesesaeeeeeesaeeeeesnaeeeens 175 Correct curled output media siirsi ananena aaia aaa EA adr ad aasa Ea aiioa KTERE aa ETa 176 Performa media r gistratio Misina a o A E eevee ee eee pte ad cece 177 Correct skewed and rotated IMagQes eesceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeseesaaeeseeeaaeeeeesnaeeeeseaaees 179 Chapter 7 Maintain the print SyStemM ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaae ea eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeasaeseaaaaaaneeeeeeeeeneeeees 181 System configuration ANd MaINtENANCE eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeaaee ee eaaeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeseseaaeeseneaaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaes 182 CONMSUMADIES e sszzetececs ocss coce cet ledeg rein beeen cea sees a a aaa aaa eN ete eee athe ote dead sis abe eee 18
224. r you can monitor printers operate printers remotely and send jobs and ready to print documents to the printer queues of all configured printers PRISMAsync remote manager must be enable and configured in the Settings Editor see Settings Editor settings and information on page 295 Refer to the user manual of PRISMAsync remote manager for the possibilities and use of this product For more information see DocBox on page 91 Workflow profiles on page 73 Print job settings on page 242 Operating concept on page 28 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 101 imagePRESS C800 Series View the jobs in the queues View the jobs in the queues The Jobs view displays the list of scheduled jobs and the list of waiting jobs Printing ic_2009_PP pdf E Stop after job z X Print now Properties Scheduled jobs Job B Preisliste Vespa Classic_2009_PP pdf Remote operator SEW_Solar Trackingsysteme_EN_Drupa_PP pdf Remote operator SEW_Solar Trackingsysteme_EN_Drupa_PP pdf Remote operator Submitted Oct 13 2014 1 40 26 PM Oct 13 2014 1 41 30 PM Oct 13 2014 3 04 14 PM Oct 13 2014 3 04 15 PM Submitted 4 jobs 1 selected Used media Ld A4D 100 o m2 TopColor White 184 8 x 244 8 mm D 1 100 g m2 TopC Ld AaB 100 g m TopColor White F A4D 100 g m2 TopColor White 52 List of scheduled and waiting jobs For more information
225. rary With color mappings you ensure that specific input colors always result in the same output color Assign color mappings to one or more color presets to include them in the job preparation workflow Leave out separations You can use color mapping to indicate layers in the document that you want to leave out whilst printing You can exclude layers for printing when you map the colors of these layers to a spot color with the value None You can use leave out separations for the following document areas e White separations e Cutting marks Spot layers that indicate a foil to be applied after the print process e Spot layers that indicate a gold print Chapter 9 References 267 imagePRESS C800 Series System specifications System specifications Print system specifications Print module Specification Value Type Color printer Resolution 1 200 dpi x 1 200 dpi Device memory SDRAM Standard 2 GB Maximum 2 5 GB Hard disk 1 TB scanning Warm up time 31 seconds after power on Print speed imagePRESS C800 80 ppm A4 80 g m2 20 Ib bond imagePRESS C700 70 ppm A4 80 g m2 20 Ib bond imagePRESS C600 60 ppm A4 80 g m 20 Ib bond Copy scan speed 600 dpi in color 70 ipm 1 sided and 2 sided First print out time 30 seconds or less from list of waiting jobs First copy out time 33 seconds or less from glass plate Power requirement 208 V 60 Hz 20A Power consumption Maximum 4 060 W Dimens
226. ray and make sure it clicks into place CAUTION When you close the paper tray be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury Return the envelope guide to its holder when the job is ready 150 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load envelopes into the internal paper trays After you finish O IMPORTANT Make sure you put the envelope guide into its holder to avoid a paper jam Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight or high temperatures Chapter 5 Print the jobs 151 imagePRESS C800 Series Load tab paper into the internal paper trays Load tab paper into the internal paper trays When you load tab paper into the internal paper tray you need to use the tab paper guide Tab Feeding Attachment F1 O IMPORTANT Only use A4 LTR tab paper Never place media or other objects in the empty parts of the paper trays This can cause a paper jam Make sure you follow the instructions carefully When you do not load the media correctly a paper jam dirty machine parts or poor print quality can occur A CAUTION When you handle paper be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper For more information see Access the print module parts on page 228 Paper input specifications on page 270 Consumables on page 185 Supported media types for paper input optionals on p
227. re Use the Settings Editor to create a hotfolder e Use the Settings Editor to link the hotfolder to the settings of an automated workflow or place the default job ticket in the hotfolder e Create a shared network folder on your workstation that links to the hotfolder and create a shortcut on your desktop Variable data printing Printing variable data VDP or variable document printing is a print method that uses variable text and graphics A VDP job has records to distinguish the different sets VDP is used for direct marketing advertising and personalized letters PRISMAprepare or VDP authoring tools allow to build personalized documents Today PDF VT print files are used to print variable data documents PDF VT enables variable document printing with the use of the latest PDF standards Submit PDF VT files to PRISMAsync with an automated workflow or a hotfolder ko XE Move Ticket Select Print now Delete To top Stop after job 2 jobs 1 selected ubmitted Duratio 17 2014 72 4j20 eae re 0 19 La A4D 80 g m a Y TopColor White Apr 17 2014 1 72 100 ERA 2 06 Ly 40 80 g m3 Ee TopColor White Schedule Jobs l Trays y System 33 A PDF VT job in the list of scheduled jobs The amp icon indicates a PDF VT file When the PDF VT job arrives in the print queue you can use the following functions e Print a proof
228. re printed jobs The jobs move to the list of waiting jobs from where you can print them fe A4P_15pages Frames pdf din B 123_VPR_CMYK_ISOcoated_1 1_F_x3 pdf oceadmin g T bs am oceadmin A3_002p pdf m n Lif Jobs with available media A4_Duplex_020p ps admin oce AI Jobs with labet Crystals_A3 ps oceadmin Apr 17 2014 10 24 29 AM Apr 17 2014 10 25 18 AM 123_VPR_CMYK_ISOcoated_1 1_F_x3 pdf T m Apr 17 2014 R Apr 17 2014 oceadmin 10 25 31 AM 10 28 19 AM aaa a mx ee Ss a SS ae i ie ea D pea Jobs Trays y System 61 The list of printed jobs NOTE The list of printed jobs must be available e You cannot reprint jobs in transaction printing mode For more information see Job management in the queues on page 99 View the jobs in the queues on page 102 Procedure 1 Touch Jobs gt Printed jobs N jobs together Press Copy Touch Queues gt Waiting jobs Select the jobs you want to reprint Touch Properties if you want to change job settings Press Print SO St w Select the jobs you want to reprint or use an option from the Select menu to select multiple 112 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Send a job to another printer Send a job to another printer You can send jobs with their or
229. reate transaction printing setups in the Settings Editor See System configuration on page 182 Work in transaction printing mode When you want to print in the transaction printing mode first activate the transaction mode and establish the connection with the IPDS or PCL host When you print in the transaction printing mode the schedule informs you which types of media the streaming job uses The schedule cannot predict the time needed for a streaming job See Schedule on page 122 Not connected Required output locations oO Schedule Jobs Trays Sh System 41 The schedule when the transaction printing mode is active 88 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Transaction printing Image adjustment You can create a transaction printing preset with an image shift definition This is useful for better alignment of variable data such as names or addresses on the page You define the image shift on the control panel but also in the Settings Editor Secure error recovery When an job error occurs in transaction printing mode the job recovery takes place from the page that caused the error When multiple pages of the same document are not allowed for example for lotteries and bank accounts you must adjust the error recovery settings When you select the secure error recovery in the Settings Editor the print system does not perform an output recove
230. reload the media stack Do not reload textured single sided coated or already printed paper to avoid a paper jam For these media take a new stack Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight or high temperatures 140 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the bulk paper module Load media into the bulk paper module The optional bulk paper module can hold up to 3 500 sheets of paper 80 g m 22 Ib bond The paper tray feeds the media face up 79 Location of the bulk paper module O IMPORTANT e When you lift the inside lifter in the paper tray for example because you dropped something do not lift the lifter more than 50 mm 2 or diagonally This can cause a malfunction or machine damage Do not hit the right hand paper guide when you load the media This can cause a malfunction or machine damage e Never place paper or other objects in the empty parts of the paper tray This can cause a paper jam Do not insert paper clips or other objects into the paper blower port on the bulk paper module Make sure you follow the instructions carefully When you do not load the media correctly a paper jam dirty machine parts or poor print quality can occur CAUTION When you handle paper be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper For more information see Bulk paper
231. resssinesssnn 70 Input and output profiles POINTING rir ra aanraai Ws 117 CescriptiOnviics ccs an een ie eee 266 printing from the list of waiting jobs 119 Inserter Job workflow commercial NAMEC eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeetetee 33 PRISMA SYNC reinii ianoaaeie aaan 28 feed instruction for stapling 259 Job by job workflow profile loading Media intO sssssssssssssrsssrirssrrinssrnen 147 descriptiON siiis inini eain 75 paitsioon oiai aaa 40 SPECIFICATIONS ciccesiviscaseccdvaisssssanesboancanccatvsoansaas 273 K supported Envelopes ccccccessseeeeeeseeeeeeeees 292 Supported Media cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 289 291 key operator Intermediate check print settings E T 295 for testing the jOb sssssssssssssssssssrsssrsrnsrnsrrnss 117 settings on control panel s ssssssssrssrserseereees 183 Internal paper tray taS kS iara adnada rari ees 29 183 feed instruction of envelopes 261 Internal paper trays L loading envelopes iNtO eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeees 149 Labels loading Media intO sssssssssssssrsssrsrsssrrnnsrnen 135 aut mated Work OWE A ar 70 loading tab paper into 152 for selection FUNCTION crsisisioinrianisantsandsnsaisonensns 99 lOCATION seeesseessteesseesstesnteseeeeeeeneesneeeneseas 32 228 Printer CriVer ic cccssescscescscsscscsessssesceesseevsseesenes 50 SPOCIFICATIONS cceeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeaaes 271 Leave out separations supported Envelopes cccceesssceeeeeseeeee
232. ries Feed direction for stapling Staple position A4 LTR A3 11 x 17 Orientation Staple setting l Orientation Staple setting Saddle stitch 38A ing ABC Chapter 9 References 255 imagePRESS C800 Series Feed direction for punching Feed direction for punching The following table shows the orientation of originals in relation to the position of punch holes Glass plate Automatic document feeder Position of the holes in the output 256 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Feed direction for folding Feed direction for folding Z fold The Z fold option folds A3 11 x 17 or A4R LTRR paper into A4 LTR or A5 SMT size respectively Orientation for the Z fold option Folded output Glass plate Automatic document feeder EH 2 127 Leading edge length 1 and feed direction 2 I E NOTE Calculate sum of the formula X 2Y 10Z Where X the number of A4 sheets which are not Z folded Y the number of A3 sheets which are not Z folded Z the number of Z folded sheets When the sum of the formula is more than 100 stapling is not possible Example 1
233. rint system stops This bar appears when you stop a job but the stop can also be a behavior of the active workflow profile The required media pane 2 shows the required media for the jobs The color of each media bar indicates if and how long these media are available The system overview 3 shows which paper tray the print system uses for the selected media in the required media pane The output location bar 4 shows the availability of the output locations The vertical red white bar in the output location bar indicates when a stack eject of the high capacity stacker occurs The print system does not go on hold after a stack eject The zoom menu 5 allows you to select a shorter or longer time scale 122 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Schedule The information of the schedule in the transaction printing mode O Schedule Jobs Trays By System 72 The schedule for the transaction printing mode The information of the schedule in transaction printing mode The timeline 1 shows the name of the streaming job The required media pane 2 shows the required media for the streaming job e The system overview 3 shows which paper tray the print system uses The output location bar 4 shows the required output locations Keep the system running Keep the system running means that the print system does not stop between jobs to achi
234. ry and deletes all remaining pages A stack eject follows when the printed output goes to the high capacity stacker As a result you must submit the job again Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 89 imagePRESS C800 Series Print in transaction printing mode Print in transaction printing mode When the transaction mode is active you select a transaction setup that matches your print requirements Create new transaction setups in the Settings Editor When the alignment of the variable data is not correct you adjust the image shift via the control panel or via a transaction printing setup with a preset defined image shift The image shift is visible on all printed output from all paper trays Transaction printing mode Active transaction setup Transaction online a Image shift in feed direction of side 1 mm fa Image shift in cross feed direction of side 1 mm G _ image shift in feed drection of side 2 mm Image shift in cross feed direction of side 2 mm D Schedule Jobs Trays By System For more information see Transaction printing on page 87 Before you begin Make sure the list of scheduled jobs is empty Procedure Touch System gt Transaction gt Transaction printing mode gt On Touch Active transaction setup to select a transaction setup Load the media into the paper trays if the tray to tray media assignment is active Touch System gt Tran
235. s If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after they have been through the automatic document feeder clean the automatic document feeder rollers It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the rollers of the automatic document feeder Before you begin Make sure the print system does not process any jobs Make sure you have clean A4 LTR paper 60 80 g m 16 Ib bond 20 Ib bond Procedure Touch System gt Maintenance Touch Start maintenance Enter your maintenance PIN Touch Clean the rollers of the ADF Follow the wizard steps Close the menu Oo NS 220 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Clean the inside of the print module Clean the inside of the print module If streaks appear on the printed output or parts of the printed image are missing clean the inside of the print module The control panel displays how long it takes to clean the inside of the print module Procedure 1 Touch System gt Maintenance Touch Start maintenance Enter your maintenance PIN Touch Clean the inside of the main unit Follow the wizard steps Close the menu OOP Wn Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 221 imagePRESS C800 Series Clean the corona assembly wires Clean the corona assembly wires If streaks appear on the printed output or parts of the printed image are missing clean the corona assembly wires inside the print module It
236. s 182 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 7 2 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 297 1 mm x 182 mm 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm 11 7 x 7 2 12 x 18 Puncher Unit BT1 4 holes Puncher Unit BT1 Default sizes A3 A4 11 x 17 LTR Custom sizes 257 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 10 1 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 297 1 mm x 182 mm 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm 11 7 x 7 2 12 x 18 Puncher Unit BS1 2 holes Default sizes LTRR Legal Custom sizes 257 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 10 1 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 297 1 mm x 182 mm 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm 11 7 x 7 2 12 x 18 Puncher Unit BS1 3 holes Puncher Unit BS1 Default sizes Letter Executive 11 x 17 Custom sizes 257 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 10 1 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 297 1 mm x 182 mm 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm 11 7 x 7 2 12 x 18 Paper weight Booklet pages 60 220 g m 16 Ib bond 82 Ib cover Booklet cover 64 300 g m2 17 Ib bond 110 Ib cover Stacking capacity for stack Upper tray ing 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R A5R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR 1 000 sheets or 147 mm 5 79 Lower tray A4 2 000 sheets or 285 mm 11 22 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTTR 1 000 sheets or 147 mm 5 79 Chapter 9 References 279 imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Stacking capacity for sta pling Maximum stapling capaci
237. s PFINtING ccccceeceeesseesteeeeeeeesssstneeeeeeeseseees 99 109 printing job ticket eeceeeesseeeeeseeeeeeeneeees 119 Warning time CONFIQUIATION ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeteneeeeeenaees 82 Waste toner container checking filling level 129 Orderin Ginea Re ea Ae haan 186 Tg 0 F lt 6 a6 eee 196 Workflow profiles Selection Ofc acini keenik 79 transaction printing MOdE eeeeeeeeeeee 73 Z Zoom COPY JODS ccccccessteeeeeeeesseeeraeeeeeeeeesssenaeeeeeeeess 236 PUPICUIOM E ETAT 250 Print SettiNG oeeie Gaede 242 SCAN ODS isi cre ig ni Teese cei eee 240 imagePRESS C800 Series 313 Index 314 imagePRESS C800 Series Canon CANON INC 30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chome Ohta ku Tokyo 146 8501 Japan CANON U S A INC One Canon Park Melville NY 11747 U S A CANON CANADA INC 6390 Dixie Road Mississauga Ontario L5T 1P7 Canada CANON EUROPA N V Bovenkerkerweg 59 1185 XB Amstelveen The Netherlands See http www canon europe com for details on your regional dealer CANON LATIN AMERICA INC 703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami Florida 33126 U S A CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 1 Thomas Holt Drive North Ryde Sydney N S W 2113 Australia CANON CHINA CO LTD 15F Jinbao Building No 89 Jinbao Street Dongcheng District Beijing 100005 China CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD 1 HarbourFront Avenue 04 01 Keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 CANON HONGKONG CO LTD 19 F The Me
238. s Templates contain predefined settings for recurring types of copy jobs The copy function shows a number of factory default templates for example to copy mixed size originals or to combine different sets of originals Furthermore you can define or change your own templates When you select a template PRISMAsync automatically uses copy and original settings for the job Minimize the copy scan job definition view so that you also can perform other tasks on the control panel You can specify the destination for the copy job When you want to print the copy job later select the list of waiting jobs or a DocBox See Job management in the queues on page 99 Default copy templates Combined copy job Booklet job Scan to USB TIFF printing TF veniet PDF printing archiving Scan to SMB le PDF viewing archiving C Schedule Jobs Trays y system 27 Default copy templates The following default copy job templates are available rempate whentoue Copy job When you have a simple copy job with one type of media Combined copy job When you have a copy job with subsets of originals Booklet job When you need copied booklets Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs 55 imagePRESS C800 Series Copy jobs Template When to use Mixed size When you have a copy job with mixed size originals The copy will also have these media sizes
239. s responsible for the job planning Print job production The print system prints and finishes jobs according to the job sequence in the list of scheduled jobs The print operator enables the system to keep running 28 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series PRISMAsync operating concept Job preparation Pri Waiti Job planning E o DocBox Ma x x x x A x z x n Scheduled X jobs Print production C Finishing and delivery Printing Media loading 4 Job workflow for document printing mode NOTE See Transaction printing on page 87 for the workflow in the transaction printing mode Staff roles and tasks The task based workflow structures the tasks in the print environment There are task splits between job preparation job planning and print production Oo Media and color expert Gu Prepress goo Print operator E Job planning E Media loading ml Finishing and delivery o Refilling toner and staples 5 Task based workflow The prepress staff know the quality requirements of the jobs and the way to submit the jobs Chapter 2 Explore the print system 29 imagePRESS C800 Series PRISMAsync operating concept The print operators can concentrate on the job planning and the print production Therefore the print operator does the following tasks e Starts up the print system Prints the jobs
240. saction gt Transaction online gt On Touch the or buttons to shift the image if required Establish the connection from the host or mainframe to the print system and submit the jobs Monitor the jobs on the control panel to make sure that all jobs are printed ose ew NS After you finish To switch off the transaction printing mode 1 Touch System gt Transaction gt Transaction online gt Off 2 Touch System gt Transaction gt Transaction printing mode gt Off 90 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Use the DocBox Use the DocBox DocBox The DocBox is short for document box The optional DocBox storage location on PRISMAsync helps to manage jobs before printing For example use the DocBox e Asa storage folder for each print operator e As a secure folder protected with a PIN Asa storage folder for jobs that need reprinting on a regular basis e As a storage folder for jobs that need further job editing or page programming e Asa storage folder for jobs that come from a hotfolder or an automated workflow Public Operator 1 Operator 2 J This view shows al avaiable DocSoxes i 3R Confidential g D schedule Jobs Trays system 42 The DocBox folders You can do the following tasks with a DocBox job e Lock the job settings e Move it to another DocBox e Combine it with an
241. se a hotfolder linked to an automatic workflow You can define if the attributes of the automated workflow must overrule the job tickets of the print files An automatic workflow can send jobs to the following PRISMAsync locations a DocBox the list of waiting jobs or the list of scheduled jobs See Job management in the queues on page 99 Create and define automated workflows in the Settings Editor See System configuration on page 182 Hotfolders The optional hotfolder feature is useful for environments that print many files with the same print settings The format of the files you can print with hotfolders depends on the print language licenses of your print system PostScript PDF Direct PDF Adobe PDF Print Engine APPE PCL 70 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Automated workflows You drop the printable files on a shortcut of the hotfolder Do not use a hotfolder for files that already have a job ticket to prevent the settings of the two sources causing a conflict A hotfolder has a connection to an automated workflow which defines the job settings However you can also apply job settings by the use of a hotfolder default ticket If this happens you can disable the automated workflow job settings Create a hotfolder default ticket default_ticket jdf with your printer driver You need to do the following tasks before you can use hotfolders e Use the Settings Editor to activate the hotfolder featu
242. settings on page 236 Output settings values and icons on page 246 56 Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Scan jobs Scan jobs The scan function enables you to create a digital document from originals You can define the individual settings for a scan job or use templates The scan function contains a number of factory default templates for example to scan mixed size originals or to combine different sets of originals Furthermore you can define or change your own templates When you select a template PRISMAsync automatically uses scan and original settings for the job Minimize the copy scan settings view so that you can also do other tasks on the control panel Scan job templates o Combined copy job Booklet job TIFF printing TIFF viewing PDF printing archiving L Scan to USB amp PDF viewing archiving Scan to SMB Q Schedule Jobs Trays By System 29 Scan job templates A scan template includes the destination of the scan file You can scan to a server workstation USB drive or to email PRISMAsync transfers the scan file to the list of scan files before it arrives in the required destination PRISMAsync automatically removes scan files from the list after a preset period but you can also remove scan files from the list in the Job view Configure the scan file transfer the s
243. sheets per set Half fold 50 sheets Features Corner stapling two point stapling Staple cut function depends on thickness set Power requirement 120 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 8 A Power consumption Maximum 500 W Dimensions WxDxH 800 mm x 792 mm x1 239 mm 31 1 2 x 31 1 4 x 48 3 4 Weight Approximately 130 kg 287 Ib Saddle Finisher AM2 Specification Value Description Stacker stapler extended with saddle stitch and saddle press functionality Paper size for stacking Location lower tray upper tray booklet tray Default sizes 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R STMTR 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTR LTTR STMTR Custom sizes upper tray 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 4 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Custom sizes lower tray 182 mm x 182 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 7 2 x 7 2 13 x 19 2 Custom sizes booklet tray 210 mm x 279 4 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 8 3 x 11 13 x 19 2 Paper size for stapling Location lower tray Default sizes A3 A4 A4R 11 x 17 LTR LTRR Custom sizes 1 staple 210 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 8 3 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 Custom sizes 2 staples 182 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 7 2 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 278 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series gt Finishing and delivery specifications Paper size for punching Location lower tray upper tray Puncher Unit BT1 2 holes Default sizes A3 A4 A4R 11 x 17 LTR LTRR Custom size
244. sign the media after loading A4 D 100 g m2 TopColor White A4B 100 g m TopColor 4 White A4B 100 g m TopColor White 441 100 g m TopColor White A4B 100 g m TopColor White A4 D 100 gim2 TopColor White A4B 80 g m TopColor White E 48 Paper trays with and without assigned media NOTE You can also use the Trays button For more information see Control panelon page 36 Media for your output on page 21 Handle media on page 130 Before you begin Determine which media the jobs need O IMPORTANT Make sure you know how to load media into the paper trays See Handle media on page 130 Procedure 1 Press the paper tray button amp Select the paper tray in which you want to load the media Press the open button on the paper tray or touch Open in the Trays view Load the media into the paper tray Close the paper tray Touch Assign if the media type in the paper tray has changed Oo P wh Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 97 imagePRESS C800 Series Assign media to a paper tray 7 Select the media from the media catalog and touch OK if applicable 8 Press the paper tray button to close the Trays view 98 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Manage the jobs in the queue Manage the jobs in the queue Job management in the queues When th
245. size Configuration gt Connectivity SA Creation of scan profiles Workflow gt Scan profiles SA import and export of sjt files and xml files A scan profile is a collection of preset set tings for a scan job Scan to SMB shares Workflow gt SMB shares SA Energy saving Settings and information Location Energy save modes low power mode Preferences gt System settings KO sleep mode and timers Chapter 9 References 297 imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor settings and information Media Color Settings and information Media catalogue new media export and import of media catalogues restore the default media catalogue Media families A media family is a set of media that uses the same output profile and calibration settings Media selection for separator sheets Media selection for front and back covers Media selection for banner sheets trailer sheets job ticket printing and calibration Settings and information Color quality defaults spot color matching default media fami ly PDF X output intent halftone for graphics halftone for text color or resolu tion priority Input profiles An input profile defines a reference color workspace for RGB and CMYK color spaces in a device independent way Output profiles An output profile defines the CMYK val ues for every media halftone combination and is independent to the device Color presets A color prese
246. staple cartridges see Consumables on page 185 e Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine When you perform a maintenance task such as replace a staple cartridge remove waste or solve jams other machine parts can continue with job process activities e Remove the seal that holds the staples together after you place the staple cartridge into the staple case E NOTE We recommend ordering staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out e Only use staple cartridges intended for your print system 107 Location of the staple unit 108 Staple N1 for Finisher AM1 and Saddle Finisher AM2 For more information see Check the filling level of the staple cartridge on page 128 Professional stacker stapler on page 43 System monitoring on page 120 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 199 imagePRESS C800 Series Replace in the professional stacker stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover of the stacker stapler 2 Hold the green tab of the staple case and pull it out NOTE When the staple unit is at the back it is difficult to pull out the staple case If this happens turn the dial on the bottom left hand side to the left to move the staple unit 3 Take out the empty staple cartridge 1 and in sert a new staple cartridge 2 4 Remove the
247. stop after the selected job is ready A horizontal red and white stop bar in the schedule and the list of scheduled jobs indicates that the stop after job function is active The print system stops when the job before the stop bar is ready 2 Touch the Resume button gt to resume the print process 154 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Remove printed output from the stacker stapler Remove printed output from the stacker stapler The output tray moves downwards during the print process to give space to the growing stack of output The workflow profile determines to which output trays PRISMAsync printed output is sent When an output tray has reached its limit the printed output automatically goes to the next available tray If all available output trays have reached their stacking limits the printing process stops Remove all printed output from the output trays The output trays move upwards and print process resumes Use the Settings Editor to turn high volume stacking for the professional stacker stapler on or off Settings Editor settings and information on page 295 See For more information see Professional stacker stapler on page 43 Standard stacker stapler on page 45 CAUTION Do not place your fingers in the stacker stapler when it is in use This can cause personal injury or stacker stapler damage When you remove paper from the output tray do not place your hands in the outp
248. stwest_kalender_select pdf A a Oct 13 201 me 848x 244 8 mm D Remote operator 1 41 30 PM 100 g m Top EA rae ExpressYrself no trimming pdf ie 3 oct 13 2014 oog a40 100g m2 Remote operator 1 42 42 PM TopColor White 7 2014 belleview2010_print pdf 6 2 Cots ar 0 36 C 235 6 x 336 6 mm Remote operator 1 43 08 PM 100 g m Top A schedule Jobs Trays e system 49 List of waiting jobs Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 99 imagePRESS C800 Series Job management in the queues Scheduled jobs The print system prints the jobs in the sequence of the list of scheduled jobs However you are able to change the print sequence when one or more jobs require priority In addition you can decide to postpone or stop a print job The schedule optional gives you up to eight hours of plan ahead predictability into the print production It tells you everything you need to know to avoid an idle print system See Schedule on page 122 Printing Tr x F 4 R Properties Delete To top Stop after job Move Select Print now Scheduled jobs Move 2 jobs 1 selected gt E B Preisliste Vespa Classic_2009_PP pdf co sree Copy to Wh tees Remote operator I TopColor White SEW_Solar Trackingsysteme_EN_Drupa_PP pdf A L403 100 g m Remote operator DI TopColor White Waiting jobs 3 jobs 0 selected b Page t Used m
249. t Finisher Staple cartridge Name Finisher AM1 Staple N1 Saddle Finisher AM2 Staple Finisher T1 Staple J1 Booklet Finisher T1 Staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge Name Saddle Finisher AM2 Staple P1 Booklet Finisher T1 Staple Cartridge D2 3 cartridges per box Staple Cartridge D3 2 cartridges per box Genuine supplies Canon has developed and manufactured toner parts and supplies specifically for use in this machine For optimal print quality and for optimal machine performance and productivity we recommend that you use Genuine Canon toner parts and supplies Contact your Canon Authorized Dealer or Service Provider for Genuine Canon Supplies Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 187 imagePRESS C800 Series Consumables 188 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Use the power modes Use the power modes Turn on the print system The print module has a main power switch to turn on the print module and all optionals You also need to wake the controller from sleep mode Be aware that the print system needs time to start up 104 The main power switch of the print module 1 and the sleep button of the control panel 2 Procedure 1 Turn the main power switch at the upper right hand side of the print module into the I position 2 Press the sleep button at the right hand side of the control panel See
250. t Office and Adobe Acrobat The printer driver provides the following features e Access to the media catalog to select the best media for the job Color preset selection for easy to use and fast color management e Many settings for the layout and finishing Templates for the print job settings you use more often Secure print jobs with a PIN e Labels to organize jobs in a DocBox or the print queue You can also use labels to print via an automated workflow e Default print ticket creation to print via hotfolders e Preview pane to show the results of the settings You can submit jobs to the following locations on PRISMAsync a DocBox the list of waiting jobs or the list of scheduled jobs See Job management in the queues on page 99 This generic procedure describes how to define a print job The online help of the printer driver provides detailed information on the available functions Download the printer drivers from the Settings Editor See System configuration on page 182 J Default media Y Show fess Bulk A4 100 g m2 TopColor White Cover A4 135 g m2 TopColar White A3 100 g m2 TopColor White A3 135 g m TopColor White Letter 8 5x11 105 g m2 TopColor White Letter 8 5x11 135 g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 105 g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 135 g m2 TopColor White Tab paper 223x297 Tab indusive Cyclic 5 160 g m2 TopColor White 9x11 Tab inclusive Cydic 5
251. t parallel fold 20 Folder Paper Folding Unit F1 a Description folder 1 Front cover to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs 2 Folding unit cover to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs 3 Tray to collect folded output See for specifications Finishing and delivery specifications on page 274 Finishing for your output on page 23 Chapter 2 Explore the print system 47 imagePRESS C800 Series Output tray Output tray The output tray Output Tray A1 collects the printed output The output tray is part of the print module Printed output goes to the output tray when no other finishing optionals are part of the print system See Main hardware parts on page 32 21 Output tray Output Tray A1 oeseiton 1 Auxiliary tray to collect large printed output A3 11 x 17 or A4R LTRR 2 Output tray to collect printed output See Finishing and delivery specifications on page 274 for specifications 48 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 3 Prepare the jobs Prepare print jobs Prepare print jobs Prepare print jobs with the printer driver The printer driver enables you to prepare the complete print job The printer driver is available in all applications for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems You can use the printer driver to submit documents from applications such as Microsof
252. t is a collection of color and quality settings that matches output re quirements A color preset is available across the complete workflow Spot colors The print system prints a spot color ina document according to values described in the spot color library Custom spot col ors are stored in a custom spot color li brary Advanced color management device link support device simulation named color profile import and export in formation and color control bars color mapping leave out separations Media gt Media Media gt Media families Preferences gt Print job defaults Preferences gt Print job defaults Preferences gt Print job defaults Color gt Color defaults Color gt Input profiles Color gt Output profiles Color gt Color presets Color gt Spot color libraries Color gt Spot colors Color gt Color mappings Color gt Color amp information bars Color gt Output profiles Color gt Spot color libraries Location Role KO KO KO KO KO tsat rate KO KO KO KO KO KO 298 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Settings Editor settings and information Settings and information Location Role Color calibration timing Color gt Color calibration KO shading correction automatic gradation adjustment timing Print quality Settings and information Location Rol
253. t of the job is printed After approval of the first set you give the print command to print the other sets in one run The print system selects another output tray for each next job 76 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Workflow profiles Manual planning workflow profile Job planning Waiting DocBox jobs Scheduled jobs Print production E Finishing and delivery E Printing E Media loading The manual planning workflow fits a workflow in which you want to determine the print priority of the jobs All jobs are received in the list of waiting jobs The print system selects another output tray for each next job Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 77 imagePRESS C800 Series Workflow profiles Unattended workflow profile i I iti Job planning Waiting 3 DocBox i jobs i Scheduled jobs Print production Finishing and delivery E Printing E Media loading The unattended workflow profile fits a workflow in which productivity is very important All jobs go to the list of scheduled jobs and are printed To keep the system running you should make sure consumables remain available and you remove printed output and waste on time For more information see DocBox on page 91 Job management in the queues on page 99 Operating concept on page 28 78 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Select a workflow profile Select a workflow profile Workflow profiles d
254. t surface e When transparencies stick together fan the stack and do not load more than 100 sheets Use new transparencies when a paper jam occurs Immediately take printed transparencies from the output tray to avoid folded transparencies This can cause a paper jam For more information see Media specifications on page 289 Check and prepare media before loading on page 130 Procedure 1 Make sure the media specifications match the paper tray specifications Only use A4 LTR or A4R LTRR transparencies See Paper input specifications on page 270 2 Remove the packaging and check that the transparencies are in good condition After you finish Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight 134 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Load media into the internal paper trays Load media into the internal paper trays Each of the three internal paper trays can hold up to 550 sheets 80 g m 2 22 Ib bond The paper trays feed the media face down There is no sensor in the paper trays that can detect the media After you open and close a paper tray the print system will not change the media settings When you load envelopes in an internal paper tray you need the envelope guide Envelope Feeder Attachment F1 See Load envelopes into the internal paper trays on page 149 77 Location of the
255. tacker stapler i Templates commercial NAME ccccccceeeesssstteeeeeeeesssstteeeeees 33 COPY ODSvasssvsecscscecicessassiceceiccncssascsscecniveneensateces 55 parts professional stacker stapler_ 43 k Printer CriVe racist ee dieteetee ees iniii 50 parts standard stacker stapler ccseccee 45 recutrin 66 spdif Monin 276 281 283 o EE haved E eenesiiis Stackin SCAN JODS iscsi iiine iiaae iadi 57 cO 9 iobs 237 Temporary media py Uae EE ea Pa ae rece te addline te the dia catalogan 96 OPTIONS si cisssecedacidansiecstecesedageragetedaccatahaentennsecuees 25 DOMGTIS sso sie iss iis ised eave ie eect dees 21 Prnt SQUUM gss ct eee teecree cc tee te eee vi 243 Toner cartridge Standard workflow profile iE a checking filling level 127 CESCLIPTION cccccccceeeesssetteeeeeeeessssstteeeeeeeeess 73 74 z Toner cartridges Staple cartridge professional stacker stapler aidera 185 replacing the staple cartridge inthe staple nnii Ha E EN E NE AT A A RLA EE EEE eibvecwansy seonennnnggccuunauesusussanannsnsnscnnnnnngggggcenencnsssee 199 Taher compartment replacing the staple cartridges in the saddle Cover 32 stitch Unitesi 201 saa ey eg ee i Trailer SHES tes secs cs cscs ssec cs sdcceesids shee sods cdencisdieasseecdeeent 105 Staple cartridge standard stacker stapler ae f Transaction printing mode replacing the staple cartridge in the staple unit Bip 204 ACTIVATING vireisievseevaceyseexaiecee
256. tandard stacker stapler matches the correct booklet size to avoid paper jams que 90 305 mm x 457 mm 12 x 18 A3 11 x 17 A7 91 A4R LTRR Chapter 5 Print the jobs 157 imagePRESS C800 Series Store the printed output Store the printed output To maintain maximum print quality you must store printed output in an optimal environment before transferring to the final destination Use the following storage recommendations Store printed output on a flat surface Store printed output so that the sheets cannot fold or crease and the toner cannot peel Use a binder for storage during a long period of time more than two years Do not put the printed output on PVC Toner can melt and stick to the PVC Do not store the printed output in a location with high temperatures Printed output can discolor after a long period of time Adhesive can be used to stick printed output sheets only use insoluble adhesive that is completely dry 158 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 6 Keep the image quality high Calibration Calibration About calibration Calibration is very important in keeping the print quality high for color reproduction The environment of your print system influences the print quality A constant temperature and humidity are essential for consistent color output PRISMAsync automatically keeps the print quality as high as possible However addi
257. te resulting in burns or a fire If you accidentally spill or scatter toner carefully wipe up the loose toner with a damp soft cloth and avoid inhaling any toner dust Do not use a vacuum cleaner that is not equipped with safety measures to prevent dust explosions to clean up loose toner Doing so may cause damage to the vacuum cleaner or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge CAUTION Keep toner out of the reach of small children If toner is ingested consult a physician immediately IMPORTANT Store toner cartridges in a cool location away from direct sunlight The recommended storage conditions are temperatures below 30 C and humidity below 80 Be careful of counterfeit toners Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners in the marketplace Use of counterfeit toner may result in poor print quality or machine performance Canon is not responsible for any malfunction accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner For more information see canon com counterfeit Waste toner container Use only waste toner containers intended for use with this machine Do not replace the waste toner container before the message prompting you to replace it appears on the touch panel display Product name Supported Canon genuine waste toner container imagePRESS C800 Series WT 401 186 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Consumables Staple cartridge in the staple uni
258. tem imagePRESS C800 Series Replace a toner cartridge 10 11 After you finish Unpack the new toner cartridge W IMPORTANT Check that the color of the toner car tridge matches the label color on the internal cover Gently tilt the new toner cartridge up and down 10 times Unscrew the red protective cap Insert the new toner cartridge as far as possi ble Close the internal cover CAUTION When you close the internal cover be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal in jury Close the toner replacement cover CAUTION When you close the toner replace ment cover be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury lt After you replace a color cartridge a color difference in the output may occur If this happens perform the Auto gradation adjustment See Ca ibrate the printer on page 162 imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 195 Replace the waste toner container Replace the waste toner container The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the waste toner container needs replacing You can replace the waste toner container at a later time but be aware that the active job or one of the next jobs will cause an error because of the full waste toner container You can find the waste toner container in the print module 106 Location of the waste toner container
259. tem configuration and maintenance Daily maintenance for operators Trained print operators can carry out specific maintenance tasks For example cleaning machine parts or procedures to improve the image quality The settings that belong to maintenance tasks for operators can be PIN protected to prevent unauthorized use Define the PIN in the Settings Editor Key operator maintenance The key operator is responsible for mechanical maintenance tasks and maintenance procedures via the control panel local key operator settings The functions that belong to the key operator role can be PIN protected to prevent unauthorized use Define the PIN in the Settings Editor Select a maintenance task and touch Start Touch Stop to return to the main screen Maintenance tasks Auto color mismatch correction Clean the clean roller main unit Clean the corona wires Clean the inside of the main unit Clean the rollers of the ADF Clean the scanner sensors Refresh the fixing belt D Perfect Binder adjustments 102 Key operator maintenance tasks on the control panel Settings Editor The following configuration settings are available In the Settings Editor Media settings to maintain the media catalog and to configure media handling Color settings to define color presets color profiles spot color libraries color control and information bars spot colors color mappings and cal
260. ters to set the day counters to null 3 Touch Print billing counters report to print the billing counters in your own language 226 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Chapter 8 Help Access the print module parts Access the print module parts The print module had several ports and connectors to connect it to optionals and other equipment Access the print module when a paper jam occurs or to perform maintenance tasks 125 External view 1 aN Oo OF FPF W N Description print module Main power switch to turn on the print module and optionals Right hand cover to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs Internal paper trays to hold the media LAN port to connect the print module to the controller Left hand cover to access the paper path to clear a paper jam Breaker to detect an excess current or a current leakage Test button to test the circuit breaker 228 Chapter 8 Help imagePRESS C800 Series Access the print module parts L x Dips Say S s 1 N 126 Internal view 1 O a A WwW N Description Front cover to access the fixing transport unit when a paper jam occurs Handle to pull out the fixing transport unit when a paper jam occurs Toner compartment cover to access the toner cartridges Toner cartridges Waste toner container to
261. the paper path when a paper jam occurs 2 Tray buttons to open a paper tray 3 Paper trays to hold the media See Paper input specifications on page 270 for specifications 38 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Bulk paper module Bulk paper module The print module has three internal paper trays with a total capacity of 1 650 sheets See Access the print module parts on page 228 You can extend the input capacity of the print system with a bulk paper module POD Deck Lite B1 This bulk paper module can hold up to 3 500 sheets 80 g m 2 22 Ib bond 4 10 Bulk paper module POD Deck Lite B1 aa Description bulk paper module 1 Release button to move the bulk paper module 2 Button to open the paper tray 3 Paper tray to hold the media 4 POD Deck Lite Attachment Kit A1 to connect the bulk paper module to the system and to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs See Paper input specifications on page 270 for specifications Chapter 2 Explore the print system 39 imagePRESS C800 Series Inserter Inserter The inserter Document Insertion Unit M1 enables you to use insert sheets such as preprinted sheets and booklet covers The print system cannot print media that comes from the inserter but you can use preprinted media Each paper tray can hold up to 200 sheets 80 g m2 22 Ib bond 11 Inserter Document Insertion Unit M1 I
262. tic document feeder P Tation Desepton The center of the original is the origin of the image Result of a scan with 100 zoom factor k Result of a scan with 50 zoom factor LA e Result of a scan with 200 zoom factor The zoom function of the glass plate The following table shows the zoom of the glass plate usraton Peeran The upper left hand corner of the glass plate is the origin of the image Result of a scan with 100 zoom factor Result of a scan with 50 zoom factor e Result of a scan with a 200 zoom factor 250 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Feed direction Feed direction Feed direction for stapling Use the automatic document feeder The following table shows the orientation of originals in relation to the required staple position Staple position A4 LTR A3 11 x 17 Orientation Staple setting Orientation Staple setting 7 1 staple 1 staple ES Top left Et Bottom left ABC BC 3 lt y 1 FS il 1
263. tings Editor PRISMAsync can verify the entered account IDs to make sure that only valid users can use the print system When a submitted job does not have a valid account ID PRISMAsync sends it to the list of waiting jobs The print system will only start to process the job when a correct account ID is entered When accounting is active the printer driver and the control panel will ask for an account ID before the print system handles the job Define the accounting mode on the control panel to determine how PRISMAsync interacts with the operator Accounting modes Per job This mode requires authentication per job You can see the last used account ID which you can overwrite e Per job Clear account ID This mode requires authentication per job You cannot see the last used account ID Fixed This mode uses a fixed account ID but you can change the account ID Be aware that the fixed mode implies that the print system overrules the account ID that is entered in the printer driver 36 Accounting modes For more information see System configuration on page 182 80 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Select an accounting mode Procedure 1 Touch System gt Setup gt Accounting 2 Press Accounting mode 3 Select an accounting mode 4 Press OK Chapter 4 Plan the jobs 81 imagePRESS C800 Series Change or disable the warning time Change or disable the war
264. tion professional stacker stapler 43 location standard stacker stapler 45 Punch waste removing professional stacker stapler 211 removing standard stacker stapler 213 Punching 310 imagePRESS C800 Series Index COPY JODSsixiertitedete etic le aaa 238 PriNt O issena unaia 100 110 print Setting sssssssssessssressrrssrsrnnnrnnnnerinnnerenenne 244 Schedule Punch color indication s ssssssssssssssssrnssrrssrsrnssrnnnsnnns 123 egoile nE r E E T 24 descripti M srsissiiisniredirei ieee 122 e r E ETT 35 R Security PIN Dolent 91 Records printer ONVGR aa ha eee eee 50 PDEF VT fil S eeceeeseeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeaees 71 Saloctian function Remote manager list of printed jODS ccccccccscscsssssesesesseeveeereteeeee 100 description A E EES 101 list of waiting jObS ccssssssssssssssescsseesseseeseeeseeees 99 license e E deed lees beesena ted kes tee age toes 35 Separator Sheets 105 h e COPY JODSis cece cee eee eee 238 244 JOA peaa Settings Editor description idhvideshiDh tefieess ce aot de vensidesiech Drieeels 121 a tomated workflow cfeatiOn na 70 specifications e E T 288 color MAaMAGEMENt ssesccccssssssecsecssssseceseessseceeees 26 starting up E 86 definition of color and information bars 243 Remote Service DocBox configuration ssesesesreeereereeeneene 91 enabling E E 225 E shreddinghescccccssssssssscsssssssssssssssessseeeessssseeee
265. tional calibration is essential to keep the color reproduction level stable for all the media types you use PRISMAsync offers a structured workflow and feedback mechanism to integrate calibration into your daily work There are two methods of calibration the printer calibration and the media family calibration Printer calibration for print operators Printer calibration has two procedures automatic gradation adjustment and the shading correction In the Calibration window of the control panel you can see which calibration procedures you must perform The control panel reminds you when to start a printer calibration with an indicator Load the calibration media as configured in the Setting Editor see below F D 92 Calibration indicator Configuration of the daily printer calibration You are strongly advised to only configure the automatic gradation adjustment for the daily printer calibration This automatic gradation adjustment includes precise adjustments of the gradation density and color quality A test print is used to scan and correct the irregularities automatically There are two modes for the automatic gradation adjustment Standard Advised for a standard print quality Professional Advised for professional print quality In the Settings Editor you can find the latest color calibration report In exceptional situations when a very high print quality is required you can add the shading correction to the calibr
266. tomatic document feeder scanning area Clean the automatic document feeder and the glass plate in order that the scanner can scan the originals correctly and can detect the size of the originals You can use water or water with a mild cleaning agent to clean this Use the cleaning cloth provided When the cleaning cloth becomes dirty wash and rinse it and then leave to dry Bi 122 Location of the automatic document feeder WARNING When you clean the machine first turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord Failure to observe these steps can result in a fire or electrical shock Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly and clean the area around the base of the power plug s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp dusty or smoky location dust can build up around the power plug and become damp This can cause a short circuit and may result in a fire O IMPORTANT Do not dampen the cloth with too much water This can damage prints or machine parts Do not use alcohol benzene paint thinner or other solvents for cleaning This can damage plastic machine parts Procedure 1 Moisten a cloth with water or a mild cleaning agent and wring it out thoroughly 2 Open the automatic document feeder 1 and clean the original scan area 2 with the cloth Then
267. tropolis Tower 10 Metropolis Drive Hunghom Kowloon Hong Kong USRM2 5254 01 CANON INC 2014
268. ty Stacking capacity for fold ing Stacking capacity for book lets Paper size for saddle stitch ing and saddle folding Features Power requirement Power consumption Dimensions WxDxH Weight Upper lower tray when high volume stacking is on AA 4 000 sheets or 490 mm 19 29 A4R LTRR 2 000 sheets or 285 mm 11 22 A3 11 x 17 1 500 sheets or 216 mm 8 5 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 1 000 sheets or 147 mm 5 79 Location lower tray A4 LTR 3 000 sheets 200 sets or 423 mm 16 65 A4R LTRR 2 000 sheets 200 sets or 285 mm 11 22 A3 1 500 sheets 200 sets or 216 mm 8 5 A4 LTR 100 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond or below 11 mm 0 43 A3 A4R 11 x 17 LTRR 50 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond or below 5 5 mm 0 22 Saddle stitching 25 sheets 100 pages 80 g m 22 Ib bond Location upper tray lower tray Z fold 30 sheets or 10 sheets per set Half fold 50 sheets Location booklet tray 30 booklets 80 g m 22 Ib bond Unlimited stacking with external catch tray Location booklet tray 330 mm x 483 mm 305 mm x 457 mm SRA3 A3 A4R 13 x 19 12 x 18 12 6 x 17 7 11 x 17 LTTR Custom sizes 210 mm x 279 3 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 8 3 x 11 13 x 19 2 Saddle press functionality to increase the flatness of booklets Folding up to 5 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib bond per set Staple cut function depends on
269. u crea tesistir A enh chink dah ink ak nel ok eet ieee 21 Medial TOR YOUR QUE DU se ceiceseceeeciscs cis exces va ctady sinana EEan 21 Finishing for your OUTDUticccccscsecccdecss cegeccsecceseceeseses spasesdacgayedeeuiie cd auletesdnsectesdessetesdeaevsisdeeneiesdecnsuneuceegienbate ss 23 Color reproduction for your OUtDULL ccceeccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeetsaaeeseaaaeesesaaaeeeeeaaeeseseaaeeeeenaaes 26 PRISMAsync operating CONCEPL cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeee ees aaeeeeesaaeeeessaaeeeesaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeeaaeeseeeaaeeenead 28 Maincthardwarepaltsis cccc focesceesdiecticicaditctciecktatises adler eee tie ee ee eee 32 Overview Of license Siana aaar A a A N 35 Control pane isisisi serenita eis eect ii vee arotan d a a raissa ae vee en fa Fang seth dec eae dle ee Pe 36 Paper MPU feessie eet ees cee cei deter eee cei end ee oe i eet eo deed eee eee de 38 Paper TMOG G asiaansa ca vnce os neues va teqeaacsscagia vat ences Ea E ARR edaseleccgixsddeeten chencade sitesi 38 Bulk paper Mod llerinin aseinaan nas cideetdeadiecacecseggnesucescteatecgceeigcenedes doe geneienensevenneseaacnees 39 VMS GUS Bsc cf ae ac 28a a e E E e aa ee ee e eaae a ee a E eea Ea 40 Automatic document FECCEL eeeceeceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeee tances eesnaeeeeaaeeeeeaaaaeeeesaaeeeseaaeeesesaaeeenenaaeeenenaees 41 Special feederen e ee ees wR kd uw E a gg Snag nde wedi vd ney hide 42 FINISHING ANG delivery un peed ee es a es ea el ee 43 Pr
270. uction of photographs pictures and images Create new color presets in the Settings Editor See System configuration on page 182 26 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Color reproduction for your output Media Families A media family is a set of media that has comparable specifications such as surface color and substrate type A media family defines the color output profiles for the media Each media family has three different output profiles for the halftone screens Normal Fine and Error diffusion When you have more than one halftone screen in a single job or page PRISMAsync automatically applies the related output profiles for optimal color management in the job When you add new media to the media catalog you specify the media family Advanced color management The Advanced color management license offers the following color features e Device simulation to simulate or proof other print engines or offset presses with your print system e Device Link support to import Device Link profiles for special CMYK conversions Named color profile import and export to extend the functionality of spot color libraries Information bars to print extra metadata on printed output There is one default information bar but you can compose other information bars Information bar selection is possible in the printer driver PRISMAprepare and via automated workflows or hotfolders e Color control
271. uding 1 cover sheet of maximum 256 g m 95 Ib cover The number of sheets vary depending on the media type and weight Maximum saddle folding 1 sheet 60 g m 256 g m 16 Ib bond 95 Ib cover capacity Features Corner stapling two point stapling Saddle stitching Power consumption From main unit Maximum 385 W Dimensions WxDxH 646 mm x 656 mm x1 121 mm 25 43 x 25 83 x 44 1 800 mm x 792 mm x1 239 mm 31 1 2 x 31 1 4 x 48 3 4 Weight Approximately 72 kg 158 Ib Punch hole distances of punch units for Staple Finisher T1 and Booklet Finisher T1 146 External 2 3 Hole Puncher C1 Booklet Trimmer D1 Description Leading edge booklet trimmer with conveyor belt Trim capacity 50 sheets 48 book pages 80 g m 22 Ib bond including 2 cover sheets up to 300 g m 110 Ib cover Trim width 2 mm 20 mm 0 08 0 8 Output capacity 30 booklets Waste tray capacity 1 500 trimmed strips Chapter 9 References 285 imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Paper size As defined for Saddle Finisher AM2 Option for Saddle Finisher AM2 Power requirement From Saddle Finisher AM2 Power consumption Maximum 300 W Dimensions WxDxH 1 575 mm x 770 mm x 1 040 mm 62 x 30 3 8 x 41 Weight Approximately 152 kg 335 Ib Two Knife Booklet Trimmer A1 Specification Value Description Two knife trimmer top and bottom edge Trim capacity for uncoated 60 80
272. uncher C1 takes power from Professional Puncher Integration Unit A1 Power consumption Professional Puncher Integration Unit A1 Maximum 130 W Professional Puncher C1 Maximum 320 W 274 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Dimensions WxDxH Professional Puncher C1 305 mm x 792 mm x 1040 mm 12 x 31 1 4 x 41 Professional Puncher Integration Unit A1 250 mm x 792 mm x 1040 mm 9 7 8 x 31 1 4 x 41 Weight Approximately 80 kg 176 Ib Professional Puncher C1 Approximately 40 kg 88 Ib Professional Puncher Integration Unit A1 Replaceable A4 die sets for Professional Puncher C1 Replaceable punch die sets EUR 20 hole Plastic Comb 21 hole Plastic Comb 23 hole round A4 LTR Twin Loop 23 hole square Twin Loop 34 hole square Twin Loop 34 hole round Twin Loop 47 hole Color Coil 12 hole Velo Bind 4 hole Loose Leaf 34 hole Pro Click 2 hole Loose Leaf 4 hole Loose Leaf Swedish 2 hole 6 5 mm Loose Leaf 4 hole 6 5 mm Loose Leaf 3 hole Loose Leaf US Loose Leaf 3 Hole 5 Hole Velo Bind 11 hole Plastic Comb 19 hole Twin Loop 21 hole 32 hole ProClick 32 Hole Color Coil 44 hole Plastic Comb 19 hole High Durability Color Coil 44 hole High Durability Loose Leaf 3 Hole High Durability Paper weight 75 216 g m 20 Ib bond 80 Ib cover uncoated 120 216 g m 32 Ib bond 80 Ib cover coated For Pro Click EU 34 hole 120 176 g m 32 Ib bond
273. upper tray 100 mm x 148 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 3 4 x 5 8 13 x 19 2 Custom sizes lower tray 182 mm x 182 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 7 2 x 7 2 13 x 19 2 Custom sizes booklet tray 210 mm x 279 4 mm 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 8 3 x 11 13 x 19 2 Paper size for stapling Location lower tray Default sizes A3 A4 A4R 11 x 17 LTR LTRR Custom sizes 1 staple 210 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 8 3 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 Custom sizes 2 staples 182 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 7 2 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 276 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series gt Finishing and delivery specifications Paper size for punching Location lower tray and upper tray Puncher Unit BT1 2 holes Default sizes A3 A4 A4R 11 x 17 LTR LTRR Custom sizes 182 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 7 2 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 297 1 mm x 182 mm 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm 11 7 x 7 2 12 x 18 Puncher Unit BT1 4 holes Puncher Unit BT1 Default sizes A3 A4 11 x 17 LTR Custom sizes 257 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 10 1 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 297 1 mm x 182 mm 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm 11 7 x 7 2 12 x 18 Puncher Unit BS1 2 holes Default sizes LTRR Legal Custom sizes 257 mm x 182 mm 297 mm x 432 mm 10 1 x 7 2 11 7 x 17 297 1 mm x 182 mm 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm 11 7 x 7 2 12 x 18 Puncher Unit BS1 3 holes Puncher Unit BS1 Default sizes Letter Executive 11 x 17 Custom sizes 257 mm x 182 mm
274. use these media more often you can add the temporary media to the media catalog In the Settings Editor you can define the attributes for these new media The temporary media remains available in the System view as long as there are jobs in the queue that use these temporary media or these temporary media are assigned to a paper tray Media and image quality Media has a big influence on the image quality and the productivity of a print system The performance of a print system the print quality and the consumption of consumables depend on media factors such as e Media type e Media weight e Surface e Moisture content e Smoothness To ensure optimal output quality and performance media must comply with the paper specifications of your print system Store the media in a dry environment away from direct sunlight Before you load the media into the paper trays it is important to check the media sheets For information detailing how to check and prepare media see Check and prepare media before loading on page 130 Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 132 Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 134 Chapter 2 Explore the print system 21 imagePRESS C800 Series Media for your output Types of media for the paper trays The paper trays of your print system can handle a variety of media types and sizes including uncoated offset coated plain recycled thin satinated tabs textured paper di
275. ut tray of the stacker stapler The output tray can move upwards and your hands may get caught Do not place your hands in the part of the output tray near the rollers where stapling takes place This can cause personal injury CURIA ang UT N gt IVA Ug Chapter 5 Print the jobs 155 imagePRESS C800 Series Remove printed output from the stacker stapler IMPORTANT Do not place objects onto the output trays of the stacker stapler This can damage the output trays Do not place objects under the paper trays of the stacker stapler This can damage the output trays W IMPORTANT For stapling with the professional stacker stapler When the width of the media is small the stapled sets can have uneven edges When stapled sets have coated covers the staples can dirty the covers of sets on the output tray You cannot staple vellums transparencies labels and envelopes W IMPORTANT For booklet making with the professional stacker stapler You cannot make booklets of vellums transparencies prepunched paper tab paper labels and envelopes When the cover weight is less than 64 g m 17 Ib bond the media can crease when saddle stitched When the cover weight is less than 64 g m 17 Ib bond the booklets can get uneven edges when trimmed When the media size is small the booklets edges can become uneven when saddle stitched When the media size is small the booklets edges
276. utput tray 286 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Weight Approximately 145 kg 319 Ib Chapter 9 References 287 imagePRESS C800 Series Remote monitor specifications Remote monitor specifications URL to access the remote monitor http lt printername or IP address gt remoteinfo https lt printername or IP address gt remoteinfo Recommended resolution of your Minimum 640 x 480 pixels computer screen Supported web browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 and higher Mozilla Firefox 10 and higher e Google Chrome 17 and higher Apple Safari 6 and higher Language As defined in your browser as long as the printer sup ports this language Update frequency Every 5 seconds Time line Fixed 30 minutes Printer information displayed e Host name e Print mode e Status panel e Attention light e Operator instruction Time line 288 Chapter 9 References imagePRESS C800 Series Media specifications Media specifications Supported media types for paper input optionals Thin 52 g m 79 g m 14 Ib bond 22 Ib bond Media type Internal pa Special Bulk paper Paper mod per tray feeder module ule Plain 80 g m 105 g m 20 Ib bond 28 Ib bond Heavy 106 g m 300 g m 28 Ib bond 110 Ib cover x41 1 Sided coated 106 g m 300 g m 28 Ib bond 110 Ib cover 2 Sided coated 106 g m
277. volatile or flammable materials such as alcohol or paint thinner e Avoid locations that are subject to vibration For example avoid installing the machine on unstable floors or stands Avoid exposing the machine to rapid changes in temperature If the room in which the machine is installed is cold but rapidly heated water droplets condensation may form inside the machine This may result in a noticeable degradation in the quality of the copied image the inability to properly scan an original or the copies having no printed image at all Avoid installing the machine near computers or other precision electronic equipment Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can adversely affect the operation of such equipment Avoid installing the machine near televisions radios or similar electronic equipment The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception Insert the power plug into a dedicated power outlet and maintain as much space as possible between the machine and other electronic equipment e Contact an authorized Canon dealer if communication is unavailable Depending on your locale or your telephone connection you may be unable to perform data communication In this case contact your local authorized Canon dealer Do not remove the machine s leveling feet Chapter 1 Preface 13 imagePRESS C800 Series Installation precautions Do not remove the machine
278. when you use temporary media more often Change the attributes of the new media with the Settings Editor LL ER wy ue Registration Skew correc Curt correcti_ To catalog A4 100 g m2 TopColor White A4 135 g m2 TopColor White A4 80 g m TopColor White A3 100 g m TopColor White A3 135 g m TopColor White Letter 8 5x11 105 g m TopColor White Letter 8 5x11 135 g m TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 105 g m TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 135 g m TopColor White A4 tab O 223x297 tab inclusive cyclic 5 160 g m2 TopColor White B Schedule A Jobs Trays 47 Temporary media on the control panel For more information see Media for your output on page 21 Procedure 1 Touch System gt Media 2 Select the media from the Temporary media section 3 Press To catalog 96 Chapter 4 Plan the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Assign media to a paper tray Assign media to a paper tray You can use the paper tray button amp at the right hand side of the control panel to check the media that are loaded in the paper trays You can assign media in the Trays view after you load the media in the paper tray As long as the media type in the paper tray does not change it is not necessary to as
279. wipe dry with a clean dry cloth 3 Pull the lever at the underside of the automatic document feeder 1 to open the document scan cover and open the inside cover 2 W IMPORTANT Open the document scan cover care fully to prevent scratches on the glass plate Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 217 imagePRESS C800 Series Clean the automatic document feeder scanning area 4 Clean the thin glass strip of the scan area Then wipe dry with a clean dry cloth 5 Close the inside cover 1 the document scan cover 2 and the automatic document feeder 3 A CAUTION e When you close the covers and the automatic document feeder be careful not to get your fingers caught This can cause personal injury Be aware that the light emitted from the glass plate can be very bright when you close the auto matic document feeder 218 Chapter 7 Maintain the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Clean the scanning sensors Clean the scanning sensors If streaks appear on the printed output or you cannot scan originals properly clean the scanner sensors Procedure Touch System gt Maintenance Touch Start maintenance Enter your maintenance PIN Touch Clean the scanner sensors Follow the wizard steps Close the menu Oe we Chapter 7 Maintain the print system 219 imagePRESS C800 Series Clean the automatic document feeder rollers Clean the automatic document feeder roller
280. wners oe The PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries Copyright 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Protected by U S Patents 6 185 684 6 205 549 7 213 269 7 272 628 7 278 168 Patents pending in the U S and other countries All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems implementation of the PostScript language interpreter Except as otherwise stated any reference to a PostScript printing device PostScript display device or similar item refers to a printing device display device or item respectively that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language Adobe the Adobe logo PostScript the PostScript Logo and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners 10 Chapter 1 Preface imagePRESS C800 Series Notes for the reader Notes for the reader Introduction Th
281. xing beltsnssiispnnsa ane O a a a tt edt be Sule vee tye 224 Enable Remote Service cccccsscccccccesssscsnnceeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeseeesseeeneaeeeeesessseenaaeeeeeeessssenaneees 225 5 imagePRESS C800 Series Contents Read the COUNTEIS siistii icraatda hee seein es ee ie Ra eee Bg eek dee dn eee AOE Ea 226 Chapter 8 Help ea a a 227 Access the print mod le parts ss i nna nntanknnnk cnn nnnn Nadine idee deceit dedi asl 228 Problem SOMN gioii naea aaa aaa atlases aa Eaa cane neaebeesscnebas shins aaao insap dieas p randai 230 Optimize the scan quality of the print SyStemM esssssssssssssrssssirrnssrnnsrrinnntinnnntnnnnntnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennnen 232 Fix density not within required range CrrOl ccceceecceeesseeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeesaeeeeeecaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneae 233 Chapter 9 PR FNC Sages cee eae Gece e cer ce ncec cxncccaaaadsannanachoncaadanaasunascaseenshentsadsnaniaatacassesesananaaana acachwacnass 235 Molotot e tees th ek Ak Ade dase oe cL eee ed Ee ee ee eed 236 COPY JOD SOUS sci gs scsccss sci eae uses eae cei ca acces eave ceeensth dean aa E aaea aa pE ends aE SE a EE 236 DCAM JOB SELIM GS atic caccii cs scseie bes a a ia a aa aaa iaiaaeaia 240 Print Job Setting Sisirin epiornito a Eaa atte eee eee eS 242 Output settings values ANC ICONS ceeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaaeeeeeaaaeeesaaeeeeaaaeeseaaeeseeeaaeeeeseaaeseneeaeeees 246 ZOOM TUNG OMe aaa
282. y available media types are not appropriate for your print system Contact your local authorized Canon dealer to order media See Consumables on page 185 For more information see Media specifications on page 289 Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 132 Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 134 Procedure 1 Make sure the media specifications match the paper tray specifications See Paper in put specifications on page 270 2 Check that the media is in good condition O IMPORTANT Do not load the following media This can cause a paper jam e Severely curled or wrinkled paper e Thin straw paper Heavy paper more than 220 g m 80 Ib cover e Paper which has been printed using a thermal transfer printer e The reverse side of paper which has been printed using a thermal transfer printer Tracing paper 130 Chapter 5 Print the jobs imagePRESS C800 Series Check and prepare media before loading 3 Remove the packaging and fan the sheets of paper several times IMPORTANT You must fan thin paper recycled paper prepunched paper heavy pa per transparencies and tab papers before you load them 4 Align the edges of the sheets When the paper is curled straighten out the paper eae PPE Zz After you finish Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlig
283. your print system Below you find an overview of the finishing options the print system supports Stapling Stapling options Finishing optional Stacker stapler Corner stapling 2 side stapling The feed direction of originals is important for stapled copies Feed direction for stapling on page 251 See Booklet making Booklet options Finishing optionals Stacker stapler J Saddle stitch unit Saddle stitched booklet Stacker stapler Saddle stitch unit Booklet trimmer Saddle stitched booklet leading edge trimmed Stacker stapler Saddle stitch unit Booklet trimmer Two knife booklet trimmer Saddle stitched booklet trimmed at three sides Chapter 2 Explore the print system 23 imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing for your output 2 Print and page order of booklets Perfect binding Perfect binding options Finishing optional Perfect binder Perfect bound book Perfect bound book trimmed at three sides Punching Punch options Finishing optionals Stacker stapler Punch unit To 0o oo 4 holes punching 3 holes punching 2 holes punching Professional punching options Finishing optionals Professional puncher Die sets eoooo o Punching with various 4 holes punching punch patterns o o 3 holes punching 2 holes punching 24 Chapter 2 Explore the print system imagePRESS C800 Series Finishing for your output Folding Folding options Finishin

Canon imagePRESS C800/C700 Operation Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents